Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Sinamics S120 AC Drive - Equipment Manual PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 342

(TXLSPHQW0DQXDO(GLWLRQ  

SINAMICS SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual AC Drive

VLQDPLFV
6,1$0,&66 
$&'ULYH 

Foreword

System overview 1

Line-side power components 2


SINAMICS
Power Modules 3
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual AC Drive 4
DC link components

Motor-side power
components 5
Manual

Control Units 6
Supplementary system
components and encoder 7
system integration

Accessories 8
Cabinet design and EMC for
components, Blocksize 9
format

Service and maintenance 10


List of abbreviations/
acronyms A

(GH6), 03/2006 Edition


6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

Prescribed Usage
Note the following:

Warning
This device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended
by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG Order No.: 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2006.


Automation and Drives 03/2006 Edition Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
D-90437 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Foreword

SINAMICS Documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in 2 parts:
• General Documentation / Catalogs
• Manufacturer/Service Documentation
An overview of publications, which is updated on a monthly and also provides information
about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at:
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol
Select the menu items "Support" → "Technical Documentation" → "Overview of Publications".
The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available under:
www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb
Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found at
the following website:
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu option "Support"

Usage phases

Table 1 Usage phase and the available documents/tools

Usage phase Tools


Orientation SINAMICS S Sales Documentation
Planning/configuration SIZER Configuration tool
Decision/ordering SINAMICS S Catalogs
Installation/assembly • SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual for Control Units and
Supplementary System Components
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Power Modules Booksize
• SINAMICS S120 Equipment Manual Power Modules Chassis
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual
Commissioning • STARTER parameterization and commissioning tool
• SINAMICS S120 Getting Started
• SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S120 CANopen Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual
Usage/operation • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 iii
Foreword

Usage phase Tools


Maintenance/servicing • SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
• SINAMICS S List Manual
• SINAMICS S150 Operating Manual

Target group
This Manual addresses planners, installation technicians, design engineers.

Benefits
This manual provides information on the components and functions of devices so that the
target group is capable of installing, setting up, testing, operating, and troubleshooting the
devices safely and correctly.

Standard scope
This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version. Extensions or
changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool
manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be able to be executed in the drive
system. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new
control or when servicing.
Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of
installation, operation or maintenance.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


iv Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Foreword

Technical Support
If you have any questions, please get in touch with our Hotline:

European and African time zones


A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 223
Internet: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
Asian and Australian time zones
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +86 1064 719 990
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
Internet: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com
American time zone
A&D Technical Support
Tel.: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2289
Internet: www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
E-mail: adsupport@siemens.com

Note
Country telephone numbers for technical support are provided under the following Internet
address:
www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Questions about the Manual


If you have any questions (suggestions, corrections) regarding this documentation, please
fax or e-mail us at:
Fax: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315
E-mail: motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com
Fax form: Refer to the reply form at the end of this manual

Internet address for SINAMICS


www.siemens.com/sinamics.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 v
Foreword

EC Declaration of Conformity
The EC Declaration of Conformity for the EMC Directive can be found/obtained from:
• in the Internet:
www.ad.siemens.de/csinfo
under Product/Order No. 15257461
• with the responsible branch office of the A&D MC Business Division of Siemens AG.

ESD information

Caution
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) are individual components, integrated circuits, or
boards that may be damaged by either electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharge.
Regulations for handling ESD components:
When handling components, make sure that personnel, workplaces, and packaging are well
earthed.
Personnel may only come into contact with electronic components, if
• They are grounded with an ESD wrist band, or
• They are in ESD areas with conductive flooring, ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps.
Electronic boards should only be touched if absolutely necessary. They must only be
handled on the front panel or, in the case of printed circuit boards, at the edge.
Electronic boards must not come into contact with plastics or items of clothing containing
synthetic fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces (work surfaces with ESD surface,
conductive ESD foam, ESD packing bag, ESD transport container).
Do not place boards near display units, monitors, or television sets (minimum distance from
screen: 10 cm).
Measurements must only be taken on boards when the measuring instrument is grounded
(via protective conductors, for example) or the measuring probe is briefly discharged before
measurements are taken with an isolated measuring device (for example, touching a bare
metal housing).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


vi Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Foreword

Safety information

Danger
Commissioning shall not start until you have ensured that the machine in which the
components described here are to be installed complies with Directive 98/37/EC.
SINAMICS S equipment must only be commissioned by suitably qualified personnel.
The personnel must take into account the information provided in the technical customer
documentation for the product, and be familiar with and observe the specified danger and
warning notices.
When electrical equipment and motors are operated, the electrical circuits automatically
conduct a dangerous voltage.
Dangerous mechanical movements may occur in the system during operation.
All work on the electrical system must be carried out when the system has been
disconnected from the power supply.

Danger
Correct and safe operation of SINAMICS S drive units assumes correct transportation in the
transportation packaging, correct long-term storage in the transport packaging, setup and
installation, as well as careful operation and maintenance.
The details in the catalogs and proposals also apply to the design of special equipment
versions.
In addition to the danger and warning information provided in the technical customer
documentation, the applicable national, local, and system-specific regulations and
requirements must be taken into account.
According to EN 61800-5-1 and UL 508, only protective extra-low voltages (PELVs) up to
30 V AC or 42.4 V DC may be connected to all connections and terminals.

Danger
As part of routine tests, SINAMICS S components will undergo a voltage test in accordance
with EN 61800-5-1. Before the voltage test is performed on the electrical equipment of
industrial machines to EN 60204-1, Section 19.4, all connectors of SINAMICS equipment
must be disconnected/unplugged to prevent the equipment from being damaged.
Motors should be connected-up corresponding to the circuit diagram supplied with the motor
(refer to the connection examples, Motor Modules). They must not be connected directly to
the three-phase supply because this will damage them.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 vii
Foreword

Note
When operated in dry areas, SINAMICS equipment conforms to the Low-Voltage Directive
73/23/EEC.

Note
SINAMICS equipment fulfills, in the configuration specified in the associated EC Declaration
of Conformance and when the EMC Mounting Guidelines is consequently implemented,
Order No. 6FC 5297-⃞AD30-0AP⃞, EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.

Warning
Operating the equipment in the immediate vicinity (< 1.8 m) of mobile telephones with a
transmitter power of > 1 W may lead to incorrect operation.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


viii Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Table of contents
Foreword ................................................................................................................................................... iii
1 System overview..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Field of application ..................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Versions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Overview, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive........................................................................................ 1-3
1.5 Components, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive .................................................................................. 1-5
1.6 System data ............................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.7 Standards................................................................................................................................... 1-8
2 Line-side power components .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Line connection variants ............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.1 Methods of line connection ........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2.2 Operation of the Line Connection Components on the Supply Network ................................... 2-4
2.2.3 Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer ................................... 2-5
2.2.4 Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Isolating Transformer........................... 2-6
2.2.5 Line Connection via a Residual-Current Circuit-Breaker........................................................... 2-7
2.3 Line filter..................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.3.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.3 Dimension drawing, Blocksize ................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.4 Dimension drawing, Chassis.................................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.5 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.6 Electrical Connection ............................................................................................................... 2-13
2.3.7 Technical data, Blocksize line filter .......................................................................................... 2-14
2.3.8 Technical data, Chassis line filter ............................................................................................ 2-14
2.4 Line reactors ............................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.4.3 Dimension drawings, Blocksize line reactors........................................................................... 2-16
2.4.4 Dimension drawing, Chassis line reactor................................................................................. 2-20
2.4.5 Installation ................................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.4.6 Electrical Connection ............................................................................................................... 2-26
2.4.7 Technical data, Blocksize ........................................................................................................ 2-27
2.4.8 Technical data, Chassis........................................................................................................... 2-29

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 ix
Table of contents

3 Power Modules ....................................................................................................................................... 3-1


3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340) ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Interface description................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.1.3.2 Line supply connection............................................................................................................. 3-16
3.1.3.3 Motor connection...................................................................................................................... 3-17
3.1.3.4 Connection to the option module, brake control ...................................................................... 3-17
3.1.3.5 Braking resistor R1/R2 ............................................................................................................. 3-17
3.1.4 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 3-18
3.1.5 Mounting................................................................................................................................... 3-25
3.1.6 Electrical installation................................................................................................................. 3-30
3.1.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.2 Power Modules Chassis........................................................................................................... 3-42
3.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.2.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 3-43
3.2.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.2.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 3-44
3.2.3.2 Sample connection................................................................................................................... 3-46
3.2.3.3 Terminal Block X9 .................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.2.3.4 DCPS, DCNS connection for a dv/dt filter................................................................................ 3-47
3.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection .................................................................. 3-48
3.2.3.6 DRIVE-CLiQ Interface X400-X402........................................................................................... 3-48
3.2.3.7 Meaning of the LEDs on the Power Module ............................................................................ 3-49
3.2.4 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 3-50
3.2.5 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis ................................................................ 3-52
3.2.6 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................ 3-53
3.2.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 3-54
3.2.7.1 Characteristics ......................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.2.7.2 Current de-rating as a function of the pulse frequency............................................................ 3-57
4 DC link components................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Blocksize .................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Braking resistors ........................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1.3 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.1.4 Mounting..................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.1.5 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2 Chassis....................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.1 Braking Modules ........................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.2.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.2.1.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1.3 Braking Module for frame size FX............................................................................................ 4-10
4.2.1.4 Braking Module for type GX ..................................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.1.5 Sample connection................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.1.6 Braking resistor connection X1 ................................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.1.7 X21 digital inputs/outputs ......................................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.1.8 S1 threshold value switch ........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.2.1.9 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size FX............................................... 4-14
4.2.1.10 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size GX .............................................. 4-17
4.2.1.11 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 4-19

Equipment Manual AC Drive


x Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Table of contents

4.2.2 Braking resistors ...................................................................................................................... 4-20


4.2.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.2.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.2.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 4-21
4.2.2.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 4-22
5 Motor-side power components................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1 Motor reactors ............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 Blocksize .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.3 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1.4 Mounting .................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.1.1.5 Electrical connection ................................................................................................................ 5-12
5.1.1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 5-13
5.1.2 Chassis .................................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.1.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.1.2.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 5-16
5.1.2.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 5-17
5.1.2.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.2 Sinusoidal filter......................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.1 Chassis .................................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.1.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.1.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.2.1.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 5-20
5.2.1.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 5-21
5.3 dv/dt filter.................................................................................................................................. 5-22
5.3.1 Chassis .................................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.1.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.1.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.1.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.3.1.4 Connection of the dv/dt filter .................................................................................................... 5-25
5.3.1.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor ............................................................................................ 5-26
5.3.1.6 Dimension drawing, limiting network ....................................................................................... 5-28
5.3.1.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 5-29
6 Control Units........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.3 Interface description................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.2.3.2 Sample connection .................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.3.3 X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ...................................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.3.4 X120 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection ................................................................ 6-9
6.2.3.5 X121 digital inputs/outputs....................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.3.6 Electronics power supply X124................................................................................................ 6-11
6.2.3.7 X21 PROFIBUS ....................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.3.8 X23 HTL/ TTL encoder interface.............................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.3.9 PROFIBUS address switches .................................................................................................. 6-13
6.2.3.10 X22 serial interface (RS232).................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.3.11 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2 ..................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.3.12 Slot for the CompactFlash card ............................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.3.13 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit 310 DP............................................................... 6-16

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 xi
Table of contents

6.2.4 Dimension drawing................................................................................................................... 6-17


6.2.5 Mounting the CU310 on the Power Module Blocksize............................................................. 6-18
6.2.6 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis ................................................................ 6-20
6.2.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET) ...................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.3.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.3.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 6-23
6.3.3.2 Sample connection................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.3.3.3 X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface..................................................................................................... 6-25
6.3.3.4 X120 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection .............................................................. 6-25
6.3.3.5 X121 digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................................... 6-26
6.3.3.6 Electronics power supply X124................................................................................................ 6-27
6.3.3.7 X200 - X201 PROFINET .......................................................................................................... 6-27
6.3.3.8 X23 HTL/ TTL encoder interface.............................................................................................. 6-28
6.3.3.9 X22 serial interface (RS232) .................................................................................................... 6-28
6.3.3.10 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2 ..................................................................................... 6-29
6.3.3.11 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit 310 PN ............................................................... 6-30
6.3.4 Dimension drawing................................................................................................................... 6-31
6.3.5 Mounting the CU310 on the Power Module Blocksize............................................................. 6-32
6.3.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 6-33
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31) ............................................................................................ 6-34
6.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.4.2 Safety Information .................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.4.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 6-35
6.4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 6-35
6.4.3.2 X200 - X202 DRIVE-CLiQ interface......................................................................................... 6-36
6.4.3.3 X224 electronics power supply ................................................................................................ 6-37
6.4.3.4 X210 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection .............................................................. 6-37
6.4.3.5 Description of the LEDs at the Control Unit Adapter 31 .......................................................... 6-38
6.4.4 Dimension drawing................................................................................................................... 6-38
6.4.5 Mounting................................................................................................................................... 6-39
6.4.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 6-40
7 Supplementary system components and encoder system integration .................................................... 7-1
7.1 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)............................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Interface description................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.3 Mounting..................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.4 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 7-5
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)....................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Interface description................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3.2 Sample connection..................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface ...................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.3.4 Electronics power supply X524.................................................................................................. 7-8
7.2.3.5 Digital inputs X520 ..................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.3.6 Digital inputs X530 ................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.3.7 Auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs X540 ............................................................................. 7-11
7.2.3.8 Analog inputs X521 .................................................................................................................. 7-12
7.2.3.9 S5 current/voltage changeover switch for analog inputs ......................................................... 7-12
7.2.3.10 Analog outputs/temperature sensor connection X522............................................................. 7-13

Equipment Manual AC Drive


xii Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Table of contents

7.2.3.11 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs .................................................................................. 7-14


7.2.3.12 Relay outputs X542.................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.2.3.13 Description of the LEDs on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31) .................................................. 7-15
7.2.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.2.5 Mounting .................................................................................................................................. 7-17
7.2.6 Electrical Connection ............................................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.7 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)....................................................................................... 7-21
7.3.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.3.2 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.3.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.3.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.3.3.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500 .................................................................................................... 7-24
7.3.3.3 X520 sensor system ................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.3.3.4 Electronics power supply X524................................................................................................ 7-26
7.3.3.5 Description of the LEDs on the SMC10 ................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 7-27
7.3.5 Mounting .................................................................................................................................. 7-28
7.3.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)....................................................................................... 7-30
7.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.4.2 Safety Information.................................................................................................................... 7-30
7.4.3 Interface description................................................................................................................. 7-31
7.4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................. 7-31
7.4.3.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500 .................................................................................................... 7-32
7.4.3.3 X520 sensor system ................................................................................................................ 7-33
7.4.3.4 Electronics power supply X524................................................................................................ 7-34
7.4.3.5 Description of the LEDs on the SMC20 ................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 7-35
7.4.5 Mounting .................................................................................................................................. 7-36
7.4.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 7-37
7.5 Option modules, brake control ................................................................................................. 7-38
7.5.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 7-38
7.5.2 Brake Relay.............................................................................................................................. 7-38
7.5.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................................... 7-38
7.5.2.2 Interface description................................................................................................................. 7-39
7.5.2.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 7-41
7.5.2.4 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 7-41
7.5.3 Safe Brake Relay ..................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.5.3.1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................... 7-42
7.5.3.2 Interface description................................................................................................................. 7-43
7.5.3.3 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................. 7-46
7.5.3.4 Mounting .................................................................................................................................. 7-47
7.5.3.5 Technical data.......................................................................................................................... 7-49
8 Accessories ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland ........................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Safety Information...................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.3 Interface description................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.4 Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.5 Mounting .................................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 8-6

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 xiii
Table of contents

8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling ................................................................................................................ 8-6


8.2.1 Description ................................................................................................................................. 8-6
8.2.2 Safety Information ...................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Interface description................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.4 Dimension drawing..................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2.5 Installation .................................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.2.6 Technical data............................................................................................................................ 8-9
8.3 Screening Kit............................................................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.1 Dimension drawings................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.3.2 Mounting................................................................................................................................... 8-18
9 Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format .................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Information ................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Safety information ...................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Selection of Devices Required for Operating SINAMICS .......................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.2 Information about line disconnecting devices ............................................................................ 9-3
9.2.3 Overcurrent protection using line fuses or circuit-breakers ....................................................... 9-3
9.2.4 Line Contactors .......................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage ............................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.3.2 Selecting power supply units...................................................................................................... 9-6
9.3.3 24 V component current consumption ....................................................................................... 9-7
9.3.4 Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................................................... 9-8
9.4 Arrangement of components and equipment............................................................................. 9-9
9.4.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.4.2 Mounting................................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing .......................... 9-11
9.5.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 9-11
9.5.2 Cable Shielding and Routing.................................................................................................... 9-12
9.5.3 Equipotential bonding............................................................................................................... 9-15
9.6 Connection Methods ................................................................................................................ 9-16
9.6.1 Screw terminals........................................................................................................................ 9-16
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling ................................................................................................. 9-17
9.7.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.7.2 Ventilation................................................................................................................................. 9-19
9.7.3 Power Loss of Components in Rated Operation ..................................................................... 9-21
10 Service and maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Safety information .................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format .................................................. 10-2
10.2.1 Replacing hardware components ............................................................................................ 10-2
10.2.2 Replacing the fan ..................................................................................................................... 10-2

Equipment Manual AC Drive


xiv Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Table of contents

10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components ..................................................... 10-7
10.3.1 Maintenance............................................................................................................................. 10-8
10.3.2 Installation equipment .............................................................................................................. 10-9
10.3.3 Replacing components .......................................................................................................... 10-10
10.3.3.1 Safety information .................................................................................................................. 10-10
10.3.3.2 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size FX.................................................... 10-11
10.3.3.3 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size GX ................................................... 10-13
10.3.3.4 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size FX.................................................................. 10-15
10.3.3.5 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size GX ................................................................. 10-17
10.4 Spare parts............................................................................................................................. 10-19
A List of abbreviations/acronyms ...............................................................................................................A-1
A.1 List of abbreviations ................................................................................................................... A-1
Index................................................................................................................................................ Index-1

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 xv
Table of contents

Equipment Manual AC Drive


xvi Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
System overview 1
1.1 1.1 Field of application
SINAMICS is the new family of drives from Siemens for industrial machines and
plant construction. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks:
• Simple pump and fan applications in the process industry.
• Complex individual drives in centrifuges, presses, extruders, elevators, as well as
conveyor and transport systems.
• Drive line-ups in textile, plastic film, and paper machines, as well as in rolling mill plants.
• Highly dynamic servo drives for machine tools, as well as packaging and printing
machines.
Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal version for any drive
task.

Figure 1-1 SINAMICS applications

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 1-1
System overview
1.2 Versions

1.2 1.2 Versions


SINAMICS offers different versions designed to meet a range of requirements:
• SINAMICS G is designed for standard applications with induction motors. These
applications have less stringent requirements regarding the dynamics and accuracy of
the motor speed.
• SINAMICS S handles complex drive tasks with synchronous/induction motors and fulfills
stringent requirements regarding
– Dynamics and accuracy,
– Integration of extensive technological functions in the drive control system

1.3 1.3 Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation


All SINAMICS versions are based on a platform concept. Joint hardware and software
components, as well as standardized tools for design, configuration, and commissioning
tasks ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide variety
of drive tasks with no system gaps. The different SINAMICS versions can be easily
combined with each other.
SINAMICS is a part of the Siemens "Totally Integrated Automation" concept. Integrated
SINAMICS systems covering configuration, data storage, and communication at automation
level ensure low-maintenance solutions with SIMATIC, SIMOTION, and SINUMERIK.

Figure 1-2 SINAMICS as part of the Siemens modular automation system

Equipment Manual AC Drive


1-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
System overview
1.4 Overview, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive

1.4 1.4 Overview, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive


SINAMICS S120 AC Drive is a modular drive system for individual axes and addresses
sophisticated drive tasks for an extremely wide range of industrial applications.
Applications include:
• Machine concepts with a central drive (e.g. presses, printing, packaging)
• Modular machine concepts where the machine modules broken down to single axes
• Single-motor drives that when compared to standard drives have a high accuracy,
stability and smooth running requirements in machinery and industrial plant construction
• Single-motor drives for transport applications (conveying, raising, lowering)
• Drives without regenerative feedback into the line supply (wire-drawing, extruding)
• Drive groups with high requirements placed on the availability (when the infeed fails, this
may not cause all of the axes to fail)
The combination of a power unit (Power Module) and a Control Unit (CU) or a Control Unit
Adapter form a single-motor drive in a compact design for machinery and plant construction.
SIZER, a high-performance engineering tool, makes it easier to choose and determine the
optimum drive configuration. The drive can be simply commissioned a user-friendly fashion
using the STARTER commissioning tool.
SINAMICS S120 AC Drive is supplemented by a wide range of motors. Whether
synchronous or induction, whether rotary or linear motors, all motor types are supported by
SINAMICS S120 AC Drive.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 1-3
System overview
1.4 Overview, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive

Configuration example

Figure 1-3 Configuration with multi-axis and single-axis drives

Equipment Manual AC Drive


1-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
System overview
1.5 Components, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive

1.5 1.5 Components, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive


This overview includes components from SINAMICS S120 AC Drive.

6,1$0,&66GULYHV\VWHP

/LQHVLGHFRPSRQHQWV /LQH0RGXOHV
/LQHUHDFWRUV 6PDUW/LQH
0RGXOHV
/LQHILOWHUV
$FWLYH/LQH
0RGXOHV
$FWLYH,QWHUIDFH
0RGXOHV


3RZHUVXSSO\ '&OLQNFRPSRQHQWV
&RQWURO6XSSO\0RGXOH %UDNLQJ0RGXOH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRUV
&DSDFLWRU0RGXOH

&RQWURO8QLWV &RQWURO8QLWV6,027,21 0RWRU0RGXOHV


&8 ' 6LQJOH0RWRU
&8 ' 0RGXOHV
' 'RXEOH0RWRU

&; 0RGXOHV


6HQVRU0RGXOHV 3RZHU0RGXOHV 2XWSXWVLGHFRPSRQHQWV


60&60& 0RWRUUHDFWRUV
60& 6LQXVRLGDOILOWHUV
60(60(


'UHKVWURPPRWRUHQ &RQQHFWLRQV\VWHP

6\QFKURQRXVPRWRUV ,QGXFWLRQPRWRUV 027,21&211(&7


)7PRWRUV 3+PRWRUV 3RZHUFDEOHV
).PRWRUV 3/PRWRUV 6LJQDOFDEOHV
)6PRWRUV 3+PRWRUV
):WRUTXHPRWRUV
*HDUER[HV

*B'B'(B

Figure 1-4 Component overview, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 1-5
System overview
1.6 System data

The following power components are available:


• Line-side power components, such as fuses, contactors, reactors and line filters for
switching the power supply and complying with EMC regulations.
• Power Modules, either with or without integrated line filter as well as integrated braking
chopper to provide power to the connected motor
To address the required functions, SINAMICS S120 AC Drive is equipped with:
• Control Units that provide the drive and technological functions.
• Supplementary system components that enhance functionality and offer different
interfaces for encoders and process signals.
The SINAMICS S120 AC Drive components were developed for installation in cabinets.
They have the following features and characteristics:
• Easy to handle, simple installation and wiring
• Practical connection system, cable routing in accordance with EMC requirements
• Standard design

1.6 1.6 System data

Table 1-1 General technical data

Electrical data
Line connection voltage
Blocksize format units 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC ± 10%.
3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ± 10%.
Installation altitudes up to 2000 m above sea level.
De-rating is required above 2000 m.
Chassis format units 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ± 10%.
Installation altitudes up to 2000 m above sea level.
De-rating is required above 2000 m.
Line frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz.
Output voltage
Blocksize format units 0 V to line supply voltage for 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC units.
0 V to 0.78 V line supply voltage for 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V AC units.
Chassis format units 0 V to line supply voltage for 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC units.
Electronics power supply
Blocksize format units 24 V DC, -15/+20 %*).
*) If a motor holding brake is used, restricted voltage tolerances may
have to be taken into account.
Chassis format units 24 V DC, -15/+20 %.
Radio interference suppression
• Blocksize format units
– Standard No radio interference suppression.
– With line filter Category C2 acc. to EN 61800-3.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


1-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
System overview
1.6 System data

Electrical data
• Chassis format units
Category C3 acc. to EN 61800-3.
– Standard
Category C2 acc. to EN 61800-3.
– With line filter
Overvoltage category III acc. to EN 60664-1
Mechanical data
Vibratory load
• Long-term storage Class 1M2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1 in transport packaging.
• Transport Class 2M3 acc. to EN 60721-3-2 in transport packaging.
• Operation Test values: 10 to 58 Hz 0.075 mm; 58 to 200 Hz 9.81 m/s2 (1 g).

Shock load
• Long-term storage Class 1M2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1 in transport packaging.
• Transport Class 2M3 acc. to EN 60721-3-2 in transport packaging.
• Operation Test values: 147.15 m/s2 (15 g) / 11 ms.

Ambient conditions
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529; Open Type acc. to UL 508.
Class of protection Class I (with protective conductor) and Class III (PELV) to EN 61140.
Type of cooling Internal air cooling, power units with forced air cooling using an
integrated fan.
Permissible ambient temperature in operation for 0 °C to +40 °C without derating, maximum installation altitude 1000 m
line-side components and Power Modules above sea level.
40 °C to +55 °C refer to derating characteristics.
Permissible ambient temperature in operation for 0 °C to +55 °C; maximum installation altitude 1000 m above sea level.
Control Units and supplementary system From an altitude of 1000 m, the max. ambient temperature decreases
components by 7°C every 1000 m.
Climatic ambient conditions
• Storage 1) Class 1K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-1 in transport packaging.
Temperature -25 °C to +55 °C.
• Transport 1) Class 2K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-2 in transport packaging.
Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C.
Maximum air humidity 95 % at 45 °C.
• Operation Class 3K4 acc. to EN 60721-3-3.
Temperature 0 °C to +40 °C.
Oil mist, formation of ice, moisture condensation, water drops, water
spray, water splashes and water jets are not permissible (EN 60204,
Part 1).
Environmental class/harmful chemical
substances Class 1C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-1 in transport packaging.
• Storage Class 2C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-2 in transport packaging.
• Transport Class 3C2 acc. to EN 60721-3-3.
• Operation
Organic/biological effects
• Storage Class 1B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-1 in transport packaging.
• Transport Class 2B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-2 in transport packaging.
• Operation Class 3B1 acc. to EN 60721-3-3.

Degree of pollution 2 acc. to 60664-1.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 1-7
System overview
1.7 Standards

Electrical data
Installation altitude
• Blocksize format units Up to 1000 m above sea level without de-rating.
Above 1000 m with current de-rating, linear to 80 % up to 4000 m.
Above 2000 m with voltage de-rating, linear to 77 % up to 4000 m.
• Chassis format units Up to 2000 m above sea level NN without de-rating,
above 2000 m up to 4000 m above sea level, refer to de-rating
characteristics.
Certificates
Conformity CE (low-voltage and EMC directives).
Approvals cULus.
Certification Safety Integrity Level 2 (SIL 2) acc. to IEC 61508, Safety Category 3
acc. to EN 954-1 for Safety Integrated – Safe Standstill (SH) and Safe
Brake Control (SBC).

1.7 1.7 Standards

Table 1-2 Essentially the application-relevant standards

Standards Title
EN 292-1 Safety of Machinery; General Design Guidelines;
Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology
EN 292-2 Safety of Machinery; General Design Guidelines;
Part 2: Technical Principles and Specifications
EN 563 Safety of machinery; temperature of services that can be touched; ergonomic data to define
temperature limit values for hot surfaces
EN 755-9 Aluminum and aluminum alloys - extrusion-pressed bars, pipes and profiles - profiles, limiting
dimensions and form tolerances
EN 954-1 Safety of machinery; safety-related parts of control systems;
Part 1: General Design Principles
EN 1037 Safety of machinery; avoiding unexpected starting
EN 55011 Industrial, scientific and medical high-frequency devices (ISM devices) - radio interference - limit
values and measuring techniques
EN 60146-1-1 Semiconductor converters; general requirements and line-commutated converters;
Part 1-1: Defining the basic requirements
EN 60204-1 Electrical equipment of machines;
Part 1: General definitions
IEC 60228 Conductors for cables and insulated conductors; guidelines for the limiting dimensions of round
cables
EN 60269-1 Low-voltage fuses -
Part 1: General requirements
IEC 60287-1 to -3 Cables - calculated the rated currents
Part 1: Rated current equations (100% load factor) and calculating the losses
Part 2: Thermal resistance -
Part 3: Main sections for operating conditions
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


1-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
System overview
1.7 Standards

Standards Title
EN 60664-X Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems
Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests
Part 3: Use of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution
EN 60721-3-X Classification of environmental conditions
Part 3-0: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Introduction
Part 3-1: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Long-term storage
Part 3-2: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; Transport
Part 3-3: Classification of environmental parameters and their severities; stationary use, weather
protected
EN 61000-6-X Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Part 6-1: Generic standard; Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments
Part 6-2: Generic standards; Immunity for industrial environments
Part 6-3: Generic standards; Generic standard emission for residential, commercial and light-
industrial environments
Part 6-4: Generic standards; Generic standard noise emission for industrial environments
EN 61140 Protection against electric shock; Common aspects for installation and equipment
EN 61158 Digital data communications for measurement and control - Fieldbus for use in industrial control
systems
EN 61800-2 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 2: General requirements - Rating specifications for low-voltage adjustable frequency a.c.
power drive systems
EN 61800-3 Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 3: EMC - Requirements and specific test methods
EN 61800-5-X Adjustable-speed electrical power drive systems;
Part 5: Safety requirements;
Main section 1: Electrical, thermal and energy requirements
Main section 2: Functional safety requirements
VDE 0100 Teil X Erection of power installations with nominal voltages up to 1000 V;
(IEC 60364-X-X) Part 200: Definitions
Part 410: Protection for safety, protection against electric shock
Part 420: Protection for safety, protection against thermal effects
Part 430: Protection of cables and conductors for over-current
Part 470: Protection for safety; use of protection for safety
Part 450: Protection for safety, protection against undervoltage
Part 5xx: Selecting and erecting electrical equipment
Part 520: Wiring systems
Part 540: Earthing, protective conductor, potential bonding conductor
Part 560: Electrical equipment for safety purposes
ISO 9001 Quality management systems - requirements
UL 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 508C Safety for Power Conversion Equipment

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 1-9
System overview
1.7 Standards

Equipment Manual AC Drive


1-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components 2
2.1 2.1 Introduction
The line connection for a SINAMICS Blocksize drive line-up comprises an optional line
reactor and an optional line filter:
• Line supply voltages:
– 1-ph. 200 V to 1-ph. 240 V AC +/- 10%.
– 3-ph. 380 V to 3-ph. 480 V AC +/- 10%.
• Line reactor versions:
– 3 versions for frame sizes A - C (chassis).
– 5 versions for frame sizes D - F (3 chassis and 2 standalone).
• Line filter versions:
– Integrated
– External
- chassis
- standalone

7KUHHSKDVH
/
/ 2SWLRQDO 2SWLRQDO
/ &RQWDFWRU /LQHUHDFWRU /LQHILOWHU 6,1$0,&66 0RWRU
)XVH
/ 8
/ 9
/ :
3(
3( 3(

Figure 2-1 Line connection, Blocksize

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-1
Line-side power components
2.1 Introduction

/
/ 2SWLRQDO
/ &RQWDFWRU /LQHILOWHU /LQHUHDFWRU 3RZHU0RGXOH 0RWRU
)XVH
/ 8
/ 9
/ :
3(
3( 3(

Figure 2-2 Line connection, Chassis

Note
The limit values for the radio interference voltage are only complied with when a line reactor
and a line filter are used (class A1 acc. to EN 61800-5-3 C2).

Caution
The following can occur if line reactors/line filters are used, which have not been approved
for SINAMICS by SIEMENS:
- the Power Modules could be damaged/destroyed.
- Line reactions can occur that can damage or interfere with other loads powered from the
same network.

Caution
The Power Modules Blocksize with line filters are only suitable for direct connection to
TN line supplies.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.2 Line connection variants

2.2 2.2 Line connection variants

2.2.1 Methods of line connection


A distinction is made between:
• Direct operation of the line connection components on the supply
• Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer
• Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Isolating Transformer

'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQ
$& 9WR $& 9 RU
$& 9WR $& 9 
5HVLGFXUUHQWFLUFXLWEUHDNHU
XQLYFXUUHQWVHQVLWLYH RSWLRQDO /
/ 1 /1
$XWRWUDQV
IRUPHU
/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH9 /LQHVXSSO\
RU9 UHDFWRU

/LQHVXSSO\YROWDJH!9 ,VRODWLQJ
RU!9 WUDQVIRUPHU
71  /LQHVXSSO\
OLQHVXSSO\ ILOWHULQWHUQDO
H[WHUQDO
0RWRULVRODWLRQQRWSHU
PLWWHGIRU,777OLQHVXSSO\

5HVLGXDOFXUUHQWFLUFXLW
EUHDNHUQRWXQLYHUVDO
FXUUHQWVHQVLWLYH 3RZHU
0RGXOH

,QVWDOODOWLWXGH!P 89:

/LQHILOWHUUHTXLUHG
IRU,777OLQHVXSSO\

Figure 2-3 Overview of line connection variants

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-3
Line-side power components
2.2 Line connection variants

2.2.2 Operation of the Line Connection Components on the Supply Network


The SINAMICS S Blocksize drive system is designed to be directly connected to TN, TT line
supply systems with grounded neutral conductor or grounded phase conductor as well as to
IT line systems with rated voltages from 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC and 1-ph. 200 V to 240 V
AC. Operation with line filter is only possible, without having to use additional measures,
when connected to TN line supply systems with grounded neutral conductor.

/
/ 2WKHU
/ ORDGV
1
3(
)XVHV

/LQHFRQWDFWRU

/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO

/LQHILOWHU
LQWH[W


RSWLRQDO /// / 1


3RZHU 3RZHU
0RGXOH 0RGXOH
89 : 8 9:

Figure 2-4 Direct operation on the line supply

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.2 Line connection variants

2.2.3 Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Autotransformer


An autotransformer can be used for voltage adaptation in the range up to 3-ph. 480 V AC
+10% or 1-ph. 240 V AC +10%.

Caution
To ensure protective separation, an isolating transformer must be used for voltages greater
than 3-ph. 480 V AC +10% and 1-ph. 240 V AC +10%.

Application example:
• The motor insulation must be protected from excessive voltages.

/
/ 2WKHU
/ ORDGV
1
3(

)XVHV

$XWRWUDQV
IRUPHU 1

)XVHV

/LQHFRQWDFWRU

/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO

/LQHILOWHU
LQWH[W
RSWLRQDO

/ / / / 1


3RZHU 3RZHU
0RGXOH 0RGXOH
8 9: 89:

Figure 2-5 Autotransformer

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-5
Line-side power components
2.2 Line connection variants

2.2.4 Operation of the Line Connection Components via an Isolating Transformer


The isolating transformer converts the type of the line supply type in the plant (e.g. IT/TT line
supply) to a TN line supply. Additional voltage adaptation to the permissible voltage
tolerance range is possible.
An isolating transformer must be used in the following cases:
• The insulation of the Power Module and/or the motor is not adequate for the voltages that
occur.
• There is no compatibility to an existing residual-current protective device.
• The installation altitude is greater than 2000 m above sea level.
• For all other systems that are not TN line supply systems with grounded neutral
conductor, a line filter should always be used.

Caution
If the line supply voltage is greater than 3-ph. 480 V AC +10% or 1-ph. 240 V AC +10%, it is
not permissible that an autotransformer is used.
In order to ensure protective separation, an isolating transformer must always be used.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.2 Line connection variants

/
/ 2WKHU
/ ORDGV
1
3(

)XVHV

,VRODWLQJ 1 1
WUDQVIRUPHU

)XVHV

/LQHFRQWDFWRU

/LQHUHDFWRU
RSWLRQDO

/LQHILOWHU
LQWH[W
RSWLRQDO

/ / / / 1


3RZHU 3RZHU
0RGXOH 0RGXOH
89: 8 9:

Figure 2-6 Isolating transformer

2.2.5 Line Connection via a Residual-Current Circuit-Breaker


In preparation

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-7
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

2.3 2.3 Line filter

2.3.1 Description
In conjunction with line reactors and a consequential implementation of the plant/system
configuration according to the EMC guidelines (Order No.: 6FC5297-☐AD30-0AP☐), line
filters limit the cable-borne noise and disturbances emitted from power modules to
permissible values for the industrial environment at the installation location.

Note
All PM340 Power Modules are equipped with an integrated line filter.
Frame size A, 400V, is an exception; in this case, an external line filter must be used.

2.3.2 Safety information

Danger
Line filters are suitable for direct connection to TN line supplies with grounded neutral
conductor.

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.
This prevents thermal overload of the line filter.

Caution
The terminals must be correctly connected:
• Incoming line cable to LINE/NETZ L1, L2, L3
• Outgoing cable to the line reactor to LOAD/LAST L1', L2', L3'
Non-observance may damage the line filter

Caution
Using line filters not released by Siemens AG for SINAMICS can lead to line reactions that
can damage or destroy other loads powered from the network.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

2.3.3 Dimension drawing, Blocksize

š

š
 

 





 

 
0
 

 

 
 


 


 
 

   

 

 

Figure 2-7 Dimension drawing: Line filter, frame size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-9
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

2.3.4 Dimension drawing, Chassis


D D

D

D

7 D Q D
W
G Q

W

D

s
/ /

/ /

/ /

K K / /
Q +
/ 1HW]/LQH /DVW/RDG /

/ /

E
%
Figure 2-8 Dimension drawing, line filter

Table 2-1 Dimensions of the line filter, all data in mm and (inches)

6SL3000- 0BE32-5AA0 0BE34-4AA0 0BE36-0AA0


B 330 (12.99) 360 (14.17) 400 (15.74)
H 240 (9.44) 240 (9.44) 265 (10.43)
T 116 (4.56) 116 (4.56) 140 (5.51)
a1 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57) 40 (1.57)
a2 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98)
a3 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 8 (0.31)
a4 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59) 15 (0.59)
a5 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43)
b 270 (10.62) 270 (10.62) 310 (12.20)
h1 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 215 (8.46)
h2 100 (3.93) 100 (3.93) 120 (4.72)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

6SL3000- 0BE32-5AA0 0BE34-4AA0 0BE36-0AA0


t1 2 (0.07) 2 (0.07) 2.5 (0.09)
t2 78.2 (3.07) 78.2 (3.07) 90 (3.54)
n1 1) 220 (8.66) 220 (8.66) 240 (9.44)
n2 1) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 250 (9.84)
n3 330 (12.99) 330 (12.99) 370 (14.56)
d 9 (0.35) 9 (0.35) 12 (0.47)

1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

2.3.5 Installation

/LQHVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ

/LQH
ILOWHU

/LQHILOWHUFDEOH

Figure 2-9 Mounting: Power Module with line filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-11
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

0RWRU
UHDFWRU

/LQH
ILOWHU

/LQHILOWHUFDEOH 0RWRUFDEOH

&DEOHIRUWKHPRWRUUHDFWRU
/LQHUHDFWRU

/LQHVXSSO\
FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 2-10 Mounting: Power Module with motor reactor, line filter and line reactor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

2.3.6 Electrical Connection

Figure 2-11 Shielding: Line filter, frame size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-13
Line-side power components
2.3 Line filter

2.3.7 Technical data, Blocksize line filter

Table 2-2 Technical data, Blocksize line filter

Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380...480 V AC


Line filter 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0
Suitable for Power Module 6SL3210-1SE11-3UA0, 6SL3210-1SE11-7UA0
6SL3210-1SE12-2UA0, 6SL3210-1SE13-1UA0
6SL3210-1SE14-1UA0
Rated current A 6
Power loss W <5
Line supply connection 2.5 mm screw terminals2
L1, L2, L3
PE connection At the housing with M4 stud
Load connection Shileded cable 3 x 2.5 mm2
U, V, W 0.4 m long
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB
Weight, approx. kg 0.5

2.3.8 Technical data, Chassis line filter

Table 2-3 Technical data, Chassis line filter

Order No. 6SL3000- 0BE32-5AA0 0BE34-4AA0 0BE34-4AA0 0BE34-4AA0 0BE36-0AA0


Suitable for 6SL3310- 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33-1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Power Module
Rated power of the Power kW 110 132 160 200 250
Module
Rated voltage V 3-ph. 380 V AC -10 % to 3-ph. 480 V AC +10 % (-15 % < 1 min), 47 to 63 Hz
Rated current A 250 440 440 440 600
Power loss kW 0.049 0.049 0.049 0.055
Line supply/load M10 M10 M10 M10 M10
connection
L1, L2, L3 / L1’, L2’, L3’
Dimensions
Width mm 360 360 360 360 400
Height mm 240 240 240 240 265
Depth mm 116 116 116 116 140
Weight kg 12.3 12.3 12.3 12.3 19.0

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4 2.4 Line reactors

2.4.1 Description
The line reactors limit lower-frequency harmonics that are fed back into the line supply. They
are used to smooth voltage spikes (line supply faults) or to bridge voltage dips/interruptions
when commutating. This is the reason that we recommend line reactors in conjunction with
PM340 and Power Module Chassis.

2.4.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be as short as possible (max. 5 m).
If possible, they should be shielded.

Caution
The terminals must be correctly connected:
- Incoming line cable to 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, and
- Outgoing cable to the load 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
Non-observance may damage the line reactor.

Caution
When using line reactors that have not been approved by SIEMENS for SINAMICS, the
following can occur:
- the Power Modules could be damaged/destroyed.
- Line harmonics that may interfere with or damage other loads connected to the same line
supply.

Caution
The surface temperature of the line reactors may exceed 80 °C.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-15
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.3 Dimension drawings, Blocksize line reactors

%

&

)UDPHVL]H&

%
&
$

)UDPHVL]H%
%
& $

)UDPHVL]H$ $

Figure 2-12 Dimension drawing: Line reactor, frame sizes A, B and C

Table 2-4 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactors, Part 1

Line reactor 6SE6400- 3CC00-4AB3 3CC01-0AB3 3CC00-2AD3 3CC00-2AD3 3CC00-4AD3


Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210- 1SB11-0UA0 1SB14-0UA0 1SE11-3UA0 1SE11-7UA0 1SE12-2UA0

Frame size A
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 200 (7.87)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 75 (2.95)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 50 (1.96)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

Table 2-5 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactors, Part 2

Line reactor 6SE6400- 6SE6400-3CC00- 6SL3203-0CD21- 6SL3203-0CD21- 6SL3203-0CD21-


3CC00-4AD3 6AD3 0AA0 0AA0 4AA0
Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210- 1SE13-1UA0 1SE14-1UA0 1SE16-0UA0 1SE17-7UA0 1SE21-0UA0
Frame size A B
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 200 (7.87) 270 (10, 62)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 75 (2.95) 153 (6.02)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 50 (1.96) 70 (2.75)

Table 2-6 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactors, Part 3

Line reactor 6SL3203- 0CD22-2AA0 0CD22-2AA0 0CD23-5AA0


Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210- 1SE21-8UA0 1SE22-5UA0 1SE23-2UA0
Frame size C
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 336 (13.22) 336 (13.22)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 189 (7.44) 189 (7.44)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 50 (1.96) 80 (3.14)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-17
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

&

)UDPHVL]H(

&

$
)UDPHVL]H'

Figure 2-13 Dimension drawing: Line reactor frame sizes D and E

Table 2-7 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactor

Line reactor 6SL3203- 0CJ24-5AA0 0CJ24-5AA0 0CD25-3AA0 0CJ28-6AA0 0CJ28-6AA0


Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210- 1SE23-8UA0 1SE24-5UA0 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0 1SE31-0UA0
Frame size D E
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 455 (17.91) 577 (22.71)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 275 (10.82) 275 (10.82)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 83.5 (3.28) 93.5 (3.68)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

&

$
%

Figure 2-14 Dimension drawing: Line reactor, frame size F

Table 2-8 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactor

Line reactor 6SE6400- 3CC11-2FD0 3CC11-2FD0 3CC11-7FD0


Suitable for Power Module
6SL3210- 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-5UA0 1SE31-8UA0

Frame size F
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 240 (9.44)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 141 (5.55)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 228 (8.97)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-19
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.4 Dimension drawing, Chassis line reactor

Dimension drawing of the line reactors


O

O O

D
D D D

Q

0RXQWLQJKROH
G
K
KPD[

Q

D

Q
K

Q Q

Q

Figure 2-15 Dimension drawing, line reactors

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

Table 2-9 Dimensions of the line reactors, all data in mm and (inches)

6SL3000- 0CE32-3AA0 0CE32-8AA0 0CE33-3AA0 0CE35-1AA0


a2 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18)
a3 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 6 (0.23)
a4 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 15 (0.59)
a5 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55)
I4 270 (10.62) 270 (10.62) 270 (10.62) 300 (11.81)
I5 88 (3.46) 88 (3.46) 88 (3.46) 100 (3.93)
hmax 248 (9.76) 248 (9.76) 248 (9.76) 269 (10.59)
h2 150 (5.90) 150 (5.90) 150 (5.90) 180 (7.08)
h3 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36)
n1 1) 101 (3.97) 101 (3.97) 101 (3.97) 118 (4.64)
n2 1) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 224 (8.81)
n3 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 212.5 (8.36)
n3 84.5 (3.32) 84.5 (3.32) 84.5 (3.32) 81 (3.19)
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8

1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-21
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.5 Installation

Figure 2-16 Mounting: Line reactor, frame size A

Table 2-10 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactor, Part 1, all data in mm and (inches)

Line reactor
6SE6400- 3CC00-4AB3 3CC01-0AB3 3CC00-2AD3 3CC00-4AD3 3CC00-6AD3
Suitable for 1SB11-0UA0 1SB14-0UA0 1SE11-3UA0 1SE12-2UA0 1SE14-1UA0
Power Module 1SB11-0AA0 1SB14-0AA0 1SE11-7UA0 1SE13-1UA0
6SL3210- 1SB12-3UA0
1SB12-3AA0
Frame size A
H 160 (6.29)
I 56 (2.20)
J 187 (7.36)
Retaining screw M4 / 1.1 Nm
Cable cross-section: 1.0 - 2 mm2).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

-
+

Figure 2-17 Mounting: Line reactors, frame sizes B and C

Table 2-11 Total and retaining dimensions, line reactor, Part 2, all data in mm and (inches)

Line reactor 0CD21-0AA0 0CD21-4AA0 0CD22-2AA0 0CD22-2AA0 0CD23-5AA0


6SL3203-
Suitable for Power Module 1SE16-0UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE23-2UA0
6SL3210- 1SE16-0AA0 1SE21-0AA0 1SE21-8AA0 1SE21-8AA0 1SE23-2AA0
1SE17-7UA0 1SE22-5UA0 1SE22-5UA0
1SE17-7AA0 1SE22-5AA0 1SE22-5AA0
Frame size B C
G 138 (5.43) 174 (6.85)
H 174 (6.85) 204 (8.03)
I 120 (4.72) 156 (6.14)
J 200 (7.87) 232 (9.13)
Retaining screw M4 / 1.5 Nm Retaining screw M5 / 2.25 Nm
Cable cross-section: 1.5 - 6 mm2). Cable cross-section: 2.5 - 10 mm2).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-23
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

Figure 2-18 Mounting: PM340 and line reactor, frame size B

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors


  
  


  
  

  


  

/DWHUDOUHWDLQLQJKROGHU

)UDPHVL]H% )UDPHVL]H&

Figure 2-19 Side mounting: Line reactors, frame sizes B and C

The line reactors for Power Modules, frame sizes A - E, are designed as sub-chassis
components.
The line reactor is retained on the mounting surface and the Power Module is mounted on
the line reactor in a space-saving fashion. The cables to the Power Modules are already
connected at the line reactor.
The line reactor is connected to the line supply through terminals.
The reactors for Power Modules, frame sizes F, FX and GX are, as a result of their weight
and their size, separately mounted.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-25
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.6 Electrical Connection

Line supply/load connection

/LQHUHDFWRU  3RZHU
0RGXOH 

8 8
/
9 9
/
*1'
/LQHVXSSO\
 : : a
/

3( 3(

Figure 2-20 Power Module with line filter

/LQHUHDFWRU /LQHILOWHU 3RZHU


0RGXOH

8 8
/ 8 /
9 9
/ 9 /
/LQHVXSSO\ *1'
: : a
/ : /

3( 3( 3(

Figure 2-21 Power Module Blocksize with line reactor and line filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-26 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.7 Technical data, Blocksize

Table 2-12 Technical data, Blocksize line reactors, Part 1

Line supply voltage 1-ph 200 V AC -10 % to 240 V AC+10%


Order No. 6SE6400-
3CC00-4AB3 3CC01-0AB3
Suitable for Power 1SB11-0UA0 1SB14-0UA0
Module 6SL3210-
Rated line reactor A 3.4 8.1
current
Power loss W 12.5 / 15 11.5 / 14.5
50 / 60 Hz
Line supply 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2
connection U1, V1,
W1
Load connection Cable 3 x AWG16 Cable 3 x AWG16
1U2, 1V2, 1W2 (3 x 1.5 mm2) (3 x 1.5 mm2)
PE connection M5 stud M5 stud
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Weight kg 1.3 1.3

Table 2-13 Technical data, Blocksize line reactors, Part 2

Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10 % to 480 V AC +10%


Order No. 6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SL3203-
3CC00-2AD3 3CC00-4AD3 3CC00-6AD3 0CD21-0AA0
Suitable for 1SE11-3UA0 1SE13-1UA0 1SE14-1UA0 1SE16-0UA0
Power Module 1SE11-7UA0
6SL3210-
1SE12-2UA0
Rated line reactor A 1.9 3.5 4.8 9
current
Power loss W 6/7 12.5 / 15 7.5 / 9 9 / 11
50 / 60 Hz
Line supply 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2
connection
U1, V1, W1
Load connection Cable 4 x AWG16 Cable 4 x AWG16 Cable 4 x AWG16 Cable 4 x AWG16
1U2, 1V2, 1W2 (1.5 mm2) (1.5 mm2) (1.5 mm2) (1.5 mm2 )
length approx. 0.38 m length approx. 0.38 m length approx. 0.38 m length approx. 0.46 m
PE connection At the housing At the housing At the housing At the housing
with M5 stud with M5 stud with M5 stud with M5 stud
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Weight kg 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.4

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-27
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

Table 2-14 Technical data, Blocksize line reactors, Part 3

Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10 % to 480 V AC +10%


Order No. 6SL3203-
0CD21-4AA0 0CD22-2AA0 0CD23-5AA0 0CJ24-5AA0
Suitable for 1SE17-7UA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE23-2UA0 1SE23-8UA0
Power Module 1SE21-0UA0 1SE22-5UA0 1SE24-5UA0
6SL3210-
Rated line reactor A 11.6 25 31.3 54
current
Power loss W 27 / 32 98 / 118 37 / 44 90 / 115
50 / 60 Hz
Line supply 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2 6 mm screw terminals2 16 mm screw terminals2
connection
U1, V1, W1
Load connection Cable 4 x AWG16 Cable 4 x AWG10 Cable 4 x AWG10 Cable 4 x 16 mm2
1U2, 1V2, 1W2 (1.5 mm2 ) (2.5 mm2 ) (2.5 mm2 )
length approx. 0.46 m Length approx. 0.49 m Length approx. 0.49 m Length approx. 0.70 m
PE connection At the housing At the housing At the housing At the housing
with M5 stud with M5 stud with M5 stud with M8 screw
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Weight kg 3.4 6.3 6.4 13

Table 2-15 Technical data, Blocksize line reactors, Part 4

Line supply voltage 3-ph 380 V AC -10 % to 480 V AC +10%


Order No. 6SL3203- 6SL3203- 6SE6400- 6SE6400-
0CD25-3AA0 0CJ28-6AA0 3CC11-2FD0 3CC11-7FD0
Suitable for 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-8UA0
Power Module 1SE31-0UA0 1SE31-5UA0
6SL3210-
Rated line reactor A 71 105 178 225
current
Power loss W 90 / 115 170 / 215 280 / 360 280 / 360
50 / 60 Hz
Line supply 16 mm screw terminals2 50 mm screw terminals2 Flat connector for M10 Flat connector for M10
connection cable lug cable lug
U1, V1, W1
Load connection Cable 4 x 16 mm2 Cable 4 x 35 mm2 Flat connector Flat connector
1U2, 1V2, 1W2 Length approx. 0.70 m Length approx. 0.70 m for M10 cable lug for M10 cable lug
PE connection At the housing At the housing At the housing At the housing
with M8 screw with M8 screw with M8 bolt with M8 bolt
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP00 IP00
Weight kg 13 19 25 25

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-28 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

2.4.8 Technical data, Chassis

Table 2-16 Technical data, Chassis line reactors

Order No. 6SL3000- 0CE32-3AA0 0CE32-8AA0 0CE33-3AA0 0CE35-1AA0 0CE35-1AA0


Suitable for 6SL3310- 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33-1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Power Module
Rated current of the A 210 260 310 380 380
Power Module
Rated voltage V 3-ph. 380 V AC -10% to 3-ph. 480 V AC +10% (-15% < 1 min), 47 to 63 Hz
Rated line reactor current A 210 260 310 380 380
Ithmax A 224 278 331 508 508
Power loss 50/60 Hz kW 0.243/0.274 0.219/0.247 0.236/0.267 0.323/0.365 0.323/0.365
Line supply/load Connection Connection Connection Connection Connection
connection lugs M10 lugs M10 lugs M10 lugs M12 lugs M12
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Weight kg 24.5 26 27.8 38 38

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 2-29
Line-side power components
2.4 Line reactors

Equipment Manual AC Drive


2-30 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules 3
3.1 3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.1 Description
The Power Modules, Blocksize format are designed as follows:
• Line side diode rectifier
• DC link electrolytic capacitors with pre-charging circuit
• Output inverter
• Chopper transistor for (external) braking resistor
• Power supply 24 V DC / 1A
• Gating unit, actual value sensing
• Fan to cool the power semiconductors
The Power Modules cover the power range from 0.12 kW to 90.0 kW and are available in
versions with and without line filter.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-1
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Table 3-1 Overview, Power Modules 340 (selection)

Power Module (230 V) frame size A, with and without Power Module frame size B, with and without integrated line
integrated line filter filter
Power Module (400 V) frame size A, without integrated
line filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Power Module frame size C, with and without integrated Power Module frame size D, without line filter
line filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-3
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Power Module frame size E, without line filter Power Module frame size F, without line filter

3.1.2 Safety information

Caution
During transport and during storage, Power Modules must be protected against mechanical
shock and vibration. It is also important to protect the unit against water (rain) and against
excessively high/excessively low temperatures.

Danger
Grounding/protective grounding of the Power Module
The Power Module housing must always be grounded. If the Power Module is not correctly
grounded, then extremely hazardous states can occur, which under certain circumstances,
can result in death.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Danger
It must be checked as to whether the Power Module is designed for the correct power supply
voltage - higher supply voltages may not be connected to the Power Module.

Danger
After connecting the line and motor feeder cables to the appropriate terminals, it must be
checked that the front covers (only frame sizes D and F) are closed and latched. Only then
may the power module be connected to the supply voltage.

Danger
It must be checked to ensure that suitable protective circuit-breaker/fuses - with the specified
rated currents - are installed between the line supply and the Power Module (refer to
Technical Data).
Only UL-listed copper cables may be used.

Danger
After disconnecting all the supply voltages, a hazardous voltage will be present in all
components for another 5 minutes. The cover for the terminals may only be opened after this
time has definitely elapsed.
When opening the protective cover, you must activate the release. A suitable tool (e.g.
screwdriver) must be used for this purpose.
Damaged components must not be used, otherwise this could result in secondary damage
or accidents.

Danger
The Power Modules conduct a high leakage current. Because of the high leakage current of
the Power Modules, a protective conductor must be permanently connected to the Power
Modules or permanently connected to the electrical cabinet.
Measures according to EN 61800-5-1 must be taken (e.g. PE conductor (≥10 mm2 Cu) or fit
an additional connection terminal for a PE conductor with the same cross-section as the
original PE conductor).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-5
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Caution
Power Modules must be mounted in the vertical position.
For the Power Modules, the following cooling clearances must be maintained above and
below the component:
- frame sizes A and B: 100 mm (3.93 inch),
- frame size C: 125 mm (4.92 inches),
- frame sizes D and E 300 mm (11.81 inches) and
- frame size F: 350 mm (13.77 inches).
When mounting the Power Modules, the following clearances must be maintained between
the components:
- frame size B: 40 mm (1.57 inch)
- frame size C: 50 mm (1.96 inch)
Power Modules frame sizes A, D, E and F can be mounted without any lateral clearance.
Devices, that could restrict the cooling air flow may not be mounted/installed in this area. It
must be carefully ensured that the cooling air flow of the Power Modules can flow
unrestricted.

Danger
Cable shields and unused power cable conductors (e.g. brake conductors) must be
connected to PE potential to prevent capacitive cross-talk charges.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.3 Interface description

3.1.3.1 Overview

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQ
PRGXOH%UDNHFRQWURO

'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1

/LQHVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ

%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRUPRWRUFDEOH

Figure 3-1 PM340, frame size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-7
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

&RQQHFWLRQZLWK
RSWLRQPRGXOH
EUDNHFRQWURO

/LQHVXSSO\FRQQHFWLRQ

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
IRUWKHOLQHVXSSO\
FDEOH

'&OLQN 3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1 FRQQHFWLRQIRUWKH
PRWRUFDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55

Figure 3-2 PM340, frame size B

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

&RQQHFWLRQZLWK
RSWLRQPRGXOH
EUDNHFRQWURO

/LQHVXSSO\
FRQQHFWLRQ

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQIRUWKH
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN IRUPRWRUFDEOH
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55

Figure 3-3 PM340, frame size C

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-9
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

/LQHVXSSO\
FRQQHFWLRQ

6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
IRUOLQHVXSSO\FDEOH 0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55 &RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ EUDNHFRQWURO
IRUPRWRUFDEOH DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH 

Figure 3-4 PM340, frame size D

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

/LQHVXSSO\
FRQQHFWLRQ

6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55 %UDNHFRQWURO
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
IRUPRWRUFDEOH DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH 

Figure 3-5 PM340, frame size E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-11
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3RZHU0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

/LQHVXSSO\
FRQQHFWLRQ
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQIRU
OLQHVXSSO\FDEOH
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ

'&OLQN
FRQQHFWLRQ'&3'&1
&RQQHFWLRQWRWKHRSWLRQPRGXOH
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU55 %UDNHFRQWURO
6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQIRU DWWKHORZHUVLGHRIWKH3RZHU0RGXOH 
PRWRUFDEOH

Figure 3-6 PM340, frame size F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

SK99$&
/ 1 3(

/LQHUHDFWRU

/ 1 3(

3RZHU
0RGXOH
 
30

30,)LQWHUIDFHWR
&RQWURO8QLW&8 
RU 
&RQWURO8QLW$GDSWHU %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
&8$ 5

'&35


¦3 '&1

8 9: 3(

6DIH%UDNH
9'& 5HOD\ 0
VXSSO\  RQO\IRU30ZLWKLQWHJUDWHGOLQHILOWHU
IRUEUDNH a
 7KHEUDNLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWLRQPXVWEHVKLHOGHG
&75/

Figure 3-7 Connection example PM340, 1-ph. 200 V - 240 V AC

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-13
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

SK99$&
/
/
/
3(

/LQHUHDFWRU

89 :
/ / / 3(

3RZHU
0RGXOH
 
30

30,)LQWHUIDFHWR
&RQWURO8QLW&8

RU 
&RQWURO8QLW$GDSWHU %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
&8$ 5

'&35


¦3 '&1

8 9 : 3(

 RQO\IRU30ZLWKLQWHJUDWHGOLQHILOWHU
9'& %UDNH5HOD\
VXSSO\ 6DIH%UDNH
0  7KHEUDNLQJUHVLVWRUFRQQHFWLRQPXVW
EHVKLHOGHG
IRUEUDNH 5HOD\ a

Figure 3-8 Connection example PM340, 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals.


The arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals for frame sizes A to F of the Power
Module 340 are shown in the following diagram. The diagram also shows the tightening
torques for the terminals.

)UDPHVL]H$b1P )UDPHVL]H%b1P
)UDPHVL]H&b1P

)UDPHVL]H'(01P
)UDPHVL]H)01P

)UDPHVL]H'WR)

Figure 3-9 Arrangement of the line supply and motor terminals for the PM340

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-15
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.3.2 Line supply connection

Table 3-2 Terminal strip, line supply connection 1-ph. 200 V - 240 V AC

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications


1 L Line phase L
2 N Line phase N

/ 1
8 9
/ /
Max. conductor cross-section: 2.5 mm²

Table 3-3 Terminal strip, line supply connection 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications


1 L1 Line phase L1
2 L2 Line phase L2
3 L3 Line phase L3
4 PE PE connection

Max. conductor cross-section: 2.5 mm²

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.3.3 Motor connection

Table 3-4 Terminal strip, motor connection 1-ph. 200 V - 240 V AC and 3-ph. 380 V - 480 V AC

Terminal Designation Technical specifications


1 DCN DC link negative
2 DCP/R1 DC link positive and position connection of the braking resistor
3 R2 Negative connection for the braking resistor
4 PE connection
5 U2 Motor phase U
6 V2 Motor phase V
7 W2 Motor phase W
Frame size A: Max. conductor cross-section 2.5 mm²

3.1.3.4 Connection to the option module, brake control

Table 3-5 Connector

Terminal 1 Designation Technical specifications


1 Low Low signal, option module brake control at PM340
2 High High signal, option module brake control at PM340

3.1.3.5 Braking resistor R1/R2

Table 3-6 Terminal strip R1/R2

Terminal Technical specifications


R1 Braking resistor connection
R2 Braking resistor connection

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-17
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.4 Dimension drawings

Figure 3-10 Dimension drawings, Power module PM340

Frame size C Frame size B Frame size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)


 
 

 

  


 



   

š




š




 

 

 
 





 

&RQQHFWLRQV0
 &RROLQJFOHDUDQFHUHTXLUHG 7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P

Figure 3-11 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340, frame size D

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-19
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 
 
 
š
   






 

 

 
Figure 3-12 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340, with integrated line filter, frame size D

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 
  
  
 
  

  
 
  
  

     


 
  É
É   
 
  

  

    



 
  

&RQQHFWLRQV0
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P
 
  
 &RROLQJFOHDUDQFHUHTXLUHG

Figure 3-13 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340, frame size E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-21
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 

 
  š  


 




 

 

 

Figure 3-14 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340, with integrated line filter, frame size E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 
  
  

  
 
    
  

  

  
  
É
 

É


  
  

  
 
  

&RQQHFWLRQV0
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH1P

&RROLQJFOHDUDQFHUHTXLUHG

Figure 3-15 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340, frame size F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-23
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 
 
 


š
 




 

 

 

Figure 3-16 Dimension drawing: Power Module PM340, with integrated line filter, frame size F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.5 Mounting

Drilling templates for frame sizes A to C


PP 

PP 
PP  š

š

š


PP 
PP 
PP 

)UDPHVL]H$
)UDPHVL]H%

)UDPHVL]H&

Figure 3-17 Drilling templates for frame sizes A to C

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-25
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Drilling templates for frame sizes D to F

PP PP PP PP PP PP


     

šPP šPP šPP


  

PP

PP PP
 

)UDPHVL]H'ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU

)UDPHVL]H'ZLWKOLQHILOWHU )UDPHVL]H(ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU

PP PP PP PP PP PP


     

šPP šPP šPP


  

PP
 PP


PP


)UDPHVL]H(ZLWKOLQHILOWHU

)UDPHVL]H)ZLWKRXWOLQHILOWHU

)UDPHVL]H)ZLWKOLQHILOWHU

Figure 3-18 Drilling templates for frame sizes D to F - with and without line filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-26 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

The dimensions and the tightening torques when retaining the Power Modules are specified
in the following table.

Table 3-7 PM340, dimensions and tightening torques when mounting

Frame size Height, width, depth Dimensions Retaining type Tightening torques
(with Control Unit)
A HxWxD mm 173 x 73 x 118.2 Each 2 M4 bolts, 2.5 Nm
nuts and with washers
Inches 6.81 x 2.87 x 4.65
washers
B HxWxD mm 203.3 x 149 x 140.7 Each 4 M4 bolts,
nuts and
Inches 8.0 x 5.87 x 5.54
washers
C HxWxD mm 247 x 185 x 163.7
Inches 9.72 x 7.28 x 6.44
D HxWxD mm 417 x 275 x 203.5 Each 4 M8 bolts, 13 Nm
Without line Inches 16.4 x 10.8 x 8.0 nuts and with washers
filter washers
D HxWxD mm 511 x 275 x 203.5
With Inches 20.1 x 10.8 x 8.0
integrated line
filter
E HxWxD mm 497 x 275 x 203.5
Without line Inches 19.6 x 10.8 x 8.0
filter
E HxWxD mm 633 x 275 x 203.5
With Inches 24.9 x 10.8 x 8.0
integrated line
filter
F HxWxD mm 634 x 350 x 315.5
Without line Inches 25.0 x 13.8 x 12.4
filter
F HxWxD mm 934 x 350 x 315.5
With Inches 36.8 x 13.8 x 12.4
integrated line
filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-27
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Table 3-8 PM340, load terminals - tightening torques

Frame size Tightening torques


A Nm 1.1
B Nm 1.5
C Nm 2.25
D Nm 6
E Nm 6
F Nm 13

For frame sizes D to F, the terminals are accessed by releasing the tongue at the side of the
terminal covers using a suitable flat screwdriver. The cover can then be pushed upwards and
engaged in this position as shown in the following diagram.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-28 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

 

 

Figure 3-19 Access to the line and motor terminals for frame sizes D to F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-29
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3.1.6 Electrical installation

Operation on non-grounded line supply systems (IT)


It is not permissible to use Power Modules with series line filter in IT line supply systems.
In order that the Power Modules remain functional when ground faults occur, a line reactor
must be connected in series.

3.1.7 Technical data

Table 3-9 Technical data PM340, Part 1

Line supply voltage 1-ph. 230 V AC ± 10 %


PM340 6SL3210– 1SB11-0UA0 1SB12-3UA0 1SB14-0UA0
PM340 with integrated line filter 6SL3210– 1SB11-0AA0 1SB12-3AA0 1SB14-0AA0
Rated output current In A 0.9 2.3 3.9
Base load current (IH) A 0.8 2.0 3.4
Output current for S6 duty (40%) ls6 A 1.4 3.3 5.5
Max. output current (lmax) A 2.0 4.6 7.8
Rated power based on In kW 0.12 0.37 0.75
Rated pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4
Efficiency η 0.80 0.90 0.91
Power loss kW 0.06 0.075 0.11
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.005 0.005 0.005
Sound pressure level dB(A) < 45 < 45 < 45
24 V DC power supply A 1.0 1.0 1.0
for the Control Unit
Rated input current1) A
with line reactor 1.9 4.8 8
without line reactor 2.2 6.0 10
Resistance value of the external Ohm ≥ 180 ≥ 180 ≥ 180
braking resistor
Max. cable length to braking resistor m 15 15 15
Line supply connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
L, N for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections
1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
Motor connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
U2, V2, W2 for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections
1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
DC link connection, connection for Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
braking resistor DCP/R1, DCN, R2 for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections for cable cross-sections
1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
PE connection at the housing at the housing at the housing
with M 4 screw with M 4 screw with M 4 screw

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-30 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Line supply voltage 1-ph. 230 V AC ± 10 %


PM340 6SL3210– 1SB11-0UA0 1SB12-3UA0 1SB14-0UA0
PM340 with integrated line filter 6SL3210– 1SB11-0AA0 1SB12-3AA0 1SB14-0AA0
Max. motor cable length 1) m 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded)
(without external options) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Depth
- PM340 with Control Unit CU310 mm 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23)
- PM340 with CUA31 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90)
Frame size A A A
Weight, approx. kg 1.2 1.2 1.3
1) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for load with the rated power (based on In) for
a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.
2) Max. motor cable length 50 m (shielded) for Power Modules PM340 with integrated line filter to maintain the limit values of EN 61800-3
Category C2.

Table 3-10 Technical data PM340, Part 2

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE11-3UA0 1SE11-7UA0 1SE12-2UA0 1SE13-1UA0 1SE14-1UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE11-3AA0 1SE11-7AA0 1SE12-2AA0 1SE13-1AA0 1SE14-1AA0
line filter
Rated output current In A 1.3 1.7 2.2 3.1 4.1
Base load current IH A 1.1 1.5 1.9 2.7 3.6
Output current for S6 duty A 1.3 2.0 2.5 3.5 4.5
(40%) lS6
Max. output current Imax A 2.6 3.4 4.4 6.2 8.2
Rated power kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5
based on In
Rated power kW 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5
based on IH
Rated pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4 4 4
Efficiency η 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Power loss kW 0.097 0.099 0.102 0.108 0.114
Cooling air requirement m /s3 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005 0.005
Sound pressure level dB(A) < 45 < 45 < 45 < 45 < 45
24 V DC power supply for A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
the Control Unit
Rated input current1) A
- with line reactor
- without line reactor 1.4 1.8 2.3 3.2 4.3
1.7 2.2 2.6 3.9 4.8
Resistance value of the Ohm ≥ 390 ≥ 390 ≥ 390 ≥ 390 ≥ 390
external braking resistor
Max. cable length to m 15 15 15 15 15
braking resistor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-31
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE11-3UA0 1SE11-7UA0 1SE12-2UA0 1SE13-1UA0 1SE14-1UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE11-3AA0 1SE11-7AA0 1SE12-2AA0 1SE13-1AA0 1SE14-1AA0
line filter
Line supply connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
sections sections sections sections sections
1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
Motor connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
U2, V2, W2 for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
sections sections sections sections sections
1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
DC link connection, Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
connection for braking for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
resistor DCP/R1, DCN, sections sections sections sections sections
R2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2 1.0 to 2.5 mm2
PE connection at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing
with M 4 screw with M 4 screw with M 4 screw with M 4 screw with M 4 screw
Max. motor cable length2) m 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded)
75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Depth
- PM340 with Control Unit mm 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23) 234.6 (9.23)
CU310
- PM340 with CUA31 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90) 175.3 (6.90)
Frame size A A A A A
Weight, approx. kg 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
1) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for a load with the rated power (based on In)
for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.

2) Max. motor cable length 50 m (shielded), 100 m (non-shielded), for Power Modules PM340 with integrated line filter to maintain the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.

Table 3-11 Technical data PM340, Part 3

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE16-0UA0 1SE17-7UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE21-8AA0 1SE22-5UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE16-0AA0 1SE17-7AA0 1SE21-0AA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE22-5AA0
line filter
Rated output current In A 5.9 7.7 10.2 18 25
Base load current IH A 5.2 6.8 9.1 14 21
Output current for S6 duty A 6.4 8.3 10.8 19.6 27.8
(40%) lS6
Max. output current Imax A 11.8 15.4 20.4 26.4 38
Rated power based on In kW 2.2 3 4 7.5 11
Rated power based on IH kW 2.2 3 4 5.5 7.5
Rated pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4 4 4
Efficiency η 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-32 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE16-0UA0 1SE17-7UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE21-8AA0 1SE22-5UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE16-0AA0 1SE17-7AA0 1SE21-0AA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE22-5AA0
line filter
Power loss kW 0.139 0.158 0.183 0.240 0.297
Cooling air requirement m /s3 0.009 0.009 0.009 0.038 0.038
Sound pressure level dB(A) < 50 < 50 < 50 < 60 < 60
24 V DC power supply for A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
the Control Unit
Rated input current1) A
- with line reactor

- without line reactor 6.1 8 10.4 18.7 26


6.7 8.9 12.4 23.1 32.6
Resistance value of the Ohm ≥ 160 ≥ 160 ≥ 160 ≥ 56 ≥ 56
external braking resistor
Max. cable length to m 15 15 15 15 15
braking resistor
Line supply connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
sections sections sections sections sections
1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2
Motor connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
U2, V2, W2 for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
sections sections sections sections sections
1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2
DC link connection, Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals Screw terminals
connection for braking for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross- for cable cross-
resistor DCP/R1, DCN, sections sections sections sections sections
R2 1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 1.0 to 6 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2 2.5 to 10 mm2
PE connection at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing
with M 5 screw with M 5 screw with M 5 screw with M 5 screw with M 5 screw
Max. motor cable length2) m 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded) 50 (shielded)
75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded) 75 (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Depth
- PM340 with Control Unit mm 254.6 (10.02) 254.6 (10.02) 254.6 (10.02) 274.6 (10.81) 274.6 (10.81)
CU310
- PM340 with CUA31 195.3 (8.47) 195.3 (8.47) 195.3 (8.47) 215.3 (8.47) 215.3 (8.47)
Frame size B B B C C
Weight, approx. kg 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.5 6.5
1) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for a load with the rated power (based on In)
for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.

2) Max. motor cable length 50 m (shielded), 100 m (non-shielded), for Power Modules PM340 with integrated line filter to maintain the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-33
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Table 3-12 Technical data PM340, Part 4

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE23-2UA0 1SE23-8UA0 1SE24-5UA0 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE23-2AA0 1SE23-8AA0 1SE24-5AA0 1SE26-0AA0 1SE27-5AA0
line filter
Rated output current In A 32 38 45 60 75
Base load current IH A 27 33 40 48 65
Output current for S6 A 37.1 49 58 78 98
duty (40%) lS6
Max. output current Imax A 52 64 76 90 124
Rated power kW 15 18.5 22 30 37
based on In
Rated power kW 11 15 18.5 22 30
based on IH
Rated pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4 4 4
Efficiency η 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Power loss kW 0.396 0.38 0.51 0.69 0.99
Cooling air requirement m /s3 0.038 0.022 0.022 0.039 0.022
Sound pressure level dB(A) < 60 < 60 < 60 < 60 < 60
24 V DC power supply A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
for the Control Unit
Rated input current 1) A
- with line reactor
- without line reactor 33 40 47 63 78
39 46 53 72 88
Resistance value of the Ohm ≥ 56 ≥ 27 ≥ 27 ≥ 27 ≥ 15
external braking resistor
Max. cable length to m 15 15 15 15 15
braking resistor
Line supply connection Screw terminals Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6,
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 for cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross-
sections section that can section that can section that can section that can
2.5 to 10 mm2 be connected be connected be connected be connected
10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2
Motor connection Screw terminals Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6,
U2, V2, W2 for cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross-
sections section that can section that can section that can section that can
2.5 to 10 mm2 be connected be connected be connected be connected
10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2
DC link connection, Screw terminals Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6, Stud M6,
connection for braking for cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross- cable cross-
resistor DCP/R1, DCN, sections section that can section that can section that can section that can
R2 2.5 to 10 mm2 be connected be connected be connected be connected
10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2 10 to 35 mm2
PE connection at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing at the housing
with M 5 screw with M6 screw with M6 screw with M6 screw with M6 screw

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-34 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE23-2UA0 1SE23-8UA0 1SE24-5UA0 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0
PM340 with integrated 6SL3210- 1SE23-2AA0 1SE23-8AA0 1SE24-5AA0 1SE26-0AA0 1SE27-5AA0
line filter
Max. motor cable m 50 (shielded) 75 (shielded) 75 (shielded) 75 (shielded) 75 (shielded)
length2) 75 (non-shielded) 100 100 100 100
(non-shielded) (non-shielded) (non-shielded) (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Height
PM 340 mm 333.4 (13.12) 511 (20.11) 511 (20.11) 511 (20.11) 633 (24.92)
with integrated line filter
Depth
- PM340 with Control mm 274.6 (10.81) 293.1 (11.53) 293.1 (11.53) 293.1 (11.53) 293.1 (11.53)
Unit CU310
- PM340 with CUA31 215.3 (8.47) 233.8 (9.20) 233.8 (9.20) 233.8 (9.20) 233.8 (9.20)
Frame size C D D D E
Weight, approx. kg 6.5 15.9 15.9 15.9 19.8
without line filter/
with integrated line filter 6.5 19.3 19.3 19.3 27.1
1) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for a load with the rated power (based on In)
for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.

2) Max. motor cable length 50 m (shielded), 100 m (non-shielded), for Power Modules PM340 with integrated line filter to maintain the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.

Table 3-13 Technical data PM340, Part 5

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE31-0UA0 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-5UA0 1SE31-8UA0
PM340 with integrated line 6SL3210- 1SE31-0AA0 1SE31-1AA0 1SE31-5AA0 1SE31-8AA0
filter
Rated output current In A 90 110 145 178
Base load current IH A 80 95 115 155
Output current for S6 duty A 117 143 188 231
(40%) lS6
Max. output current Imax A 150 180 220 290
Rated power based on In kW 45 55 75 90
Rated power based on IH kW 37 45 55 75
Rated pulse frequency kHz 4 4 4 4
Efficiency η 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
Power loss kW 1.21 1.42 1.93 2.31
Cooling air requirement m3/s 0.039 0.094 0.094 0.117
Sound pressure level dB(A) 62 < 60 < 60 65
24 V DC power supply for A 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
the Control Unit

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-35
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Line voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC


PM340 6SL3210- 1SE31-0UA0 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-5UA0 1SE31-8UA0
PM340 with integrated line 6SL3210- 1SE31-0AA0 1SE31-1AA0 1SE31-5AA0 1SE31-8AA0
filter
Rated input current1) A
- with line reactor
- without line reactor 94 115 151 186
105 129 168 204
Resistance value of the Ohm ≥ 15 ≥ 8.2 ≥ 8.2 ≥ 8.2
external braking resistor
Max. cable length to braking m 15 15 15 15
resistor
Line supply connection Stud M6, Stud M8, Stud M8, Stud M8,
U1/L1, V1/L2, W1/L3 cable cross-section max. cable cross- max. cable cross- max. cable cross-
that can be section that can be section that can be section that can be
connected connected connected connected
10 to 35 mm2 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or
2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2
Motor connection Stud M6, Stud M8, Stud M8, Stud M8,
U2, V2, W2 cable cross-section max. cable cross- max. cable cross- max. cable cross-
that can be section that can be section that can be section that can be
connected connected connected connected
10 to 35 mm2 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or
2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2
DC link connection, Stud M6, Stud M8, Stud M8, Stud M8,
connection for braking cable cross-section max. cable cross- max. cable cross- max. cable cross-
resistor DCP/R1, DCN, R2 that can be section that can be section that can be section that can be
connected connected connected connected
10 to 35 mm2 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or 1 x 120 mm2 or
2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2 2 x 50 mm2
PE connection at the housing with At the housing with At the housing with At the housing with
M6 screw M8 screw M8 screw M8 screw
Max. motor cable length2) m 75 (shielded) 70 (shielded) 70 (shielded) 70 (shielded)
100 (non-shielded) 100 (non-shielded) 100 (non-shielded) 100 (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Height
PM 340 with integrated line mm 633 (24.92) 934 (36.77) 934 (36.77) 934 (36.77)
filter
Depth
- PM340 with Control Unit mm 293.1 (11.53) 405.1 (15.94) 405.1 (15.94) 405.1 (15.94)
CU310
- PM340 with CUA31 233.8 (9.20) 345.8 (13.61) 345.8 (13.61) 345.8 (13.61)
Frame size E F F F
Weight, approx. without line kg 19.8 50.7 50.7 50.7
filter/
with integrated line filter 27.1 66.7 66.7 66.7
1) The input current depends on the motor load and line impedance. The input currents apply for a load with the rated power (based on In)
for a line impedance corresponding to uk = 1%.

2) Max. motor cable length 50 m (shielded), 100 m (non-shielded), for Power Modules PM340 with integrated line filter to maintain the limit
values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-36 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Table 3-14 Cooling air requirement

Frame size Required cooling air quantity


A M3/h 17.3
B M3/h 86.4
C M3/h 197.6
D M3/h 197.6
E M3/h 396
F M3/h 540

Interrelationship between the pulse frequency and current de-rating

Table 3-15 Current de-rating depending on the pulse frequency

Order Line Rated Power Output current in A at a switching frequency of:


No. voltage output (high
current overload)
6SL3210 A [kW] 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
- 70% 50% 40%
1SB11- 1-ph. 230 0.9 0.12 0.9 0.7 0.54 0.4 0.3 0.3 0.2
0UA0 V AC
1SB12- 2.3 0.37 2.3 1.8 1.3 1.1 0.9 0.8 0.6
3UA0
1SB14- 3.9 0.75 3.9 3.1 2.3 1.9 1.5 1.3 1.1
0UA0
1SE11- 3-ph. 400 1.3 0.37 1.3 - 0.91 - 0.65 - 0.52
3UA0 V AC
1SE11- 1.7 0.55 1.7 - 1.19 - 0.85 - 0.68
7UA0
1SE12- 2.2 0.75 2.2 - 1.54 - 1.1 - 0.88
2UA0
1SE13- 3.1 1.1 3.1 - 2.17 - 1.55 - 1.24
1UA0
1SE14- 4.1 1.5 4.1 - 2.87 - 2.05 - 1.64
1UA0
1SE16- 5.9 2.2 5.9 - 4.13 - 2.95 - 2.36
0UA0
1SE17- 7.7 3 7.7 - 5.39 - 3.85 - 3.08
7UA0
1SE21- 10 4 10 - 7 - 5 - 4
0UA0
1SE21- 18 5.5 18 - 12.6 - 9 - 7.02
8UA0
1SE22- 25 7.5 25 - 17.5 - 12.5 - 10
5UA0

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-37
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Order Line Rated Power Output current in A at a switching frequency of:


No. voltage output (high
current overload)
6SL3210 A [kW] 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
- 70% 50% 40%
1SE23- 32 15.0 32.0 30.4 28.8 25.6 22.4 19.2 16.0
2UA0
1SE23- 38 18.5 38.0 34.2 30.4 26.6 22.8 19.0 15.2
8UA0
1SE24- 45 22.0 45.0 40.5 36.0 31.5 27.0 22.5 18.0
5UA0
1SE26- 60 30.0 62.0 58.9 55.8 49.6 43.4 37.2 31.0
0UA0
1SE27- 75 37.0 75.0 67.5 60.0 52.5 45.0 37.5 30.0
5UA0
1SE31- 90 45.0 90.0 76.5 63.0 51.8 40.5 33.8 27.0
0UA0
1SE31- 110 55.0 110.0 93.5 77.0 63.3 49.5 41.3 33.0
1UA0
1SE31- 145 75.0 145.0 112.4 79.8 68.9 58.0 50.8 43.5
5UA0
1SE31- 178 15.0 32.0 30.4 28.8 25.6 22.4 19.2 16.0
8UA0

Overload capability

Figure 3-20 Load cycle with pre-load condition

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-38 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

Figure 3-21 Load cycle without pre-load condition

Figure 3-22 S6 load cycle with pre-load condition

Figure 3-23 S6 load cycle with pre-load condition

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-39
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

[,+

%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
‘V
‘V

W

Figure 3-24 Load cycle with 60 s overload with a load cycle period of 300 s

[,+
%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+
,Q
,+
30 s
300 s

Figure 3-25 Load cycle with 30 s overload with a load cycle period of 300 s

Derating characteristic for Power Modules in Blocksize format


Frame sizes A - C




3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW









         N+] 
3XOVHIUHTXHQF\

Figure 3-26 Output current as a function of pulse frequency

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-40 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.1 Power Modules Blocksize (PM340)

3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW

>@









>r&@
   
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH

Figure 3-27 Output power as a function of ambient temperature

>@ 3HUPLVVLEOHRXWSXWFXUUHQW









>P@
     
,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGHDERYHVHDOHYHO

Figure 3-28 Output power as a function of installation altitude

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-41
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

 

&RUUHFWLRQIDFWRUN8
3HUPLVVLEOHLQSXWYROWDJHDVD
 

RIWKHUDWHGYROWDJH
 

 
    P 

,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH
DERYHVHDOHYHO

Figure 3-29 Voltage correction factor as a function of installation altitude

3.2 3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.1 Description
A Power Module is a power unit (frequency inverter) that provides the power supply for the
connected motor. A Power Module must be connected to a Control Unit via DRIVE-CLiQ.
The open-loop and closed-loop control functions are stored in the Control Unit.

Characteristics of Power Modules


• Version from 210 A to 490 A
• Internal air cooling
• Short-circuit/ground-fault-proof
• Electronic type plate
• Operating status and error status displayed using LEDs
• DRIVE-CLiQ interface for communication with the Control Unit and/or other components
in the drive line-up
• Integration in system diagnostics

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-42 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.2 Safety information

Danger
After disconnecting all the supply voltages, a hazardous voltage will be present at all Power
Modules for another 5 minutes. Work cannot be carried out until this time has elapsed.

Danger
The DC link discharge voltage hazard warning in the local language must be attached to all
of the components.

Caution
The cooling clearances above, below, and in front of the component, which are specified in
the dimension drawings, must be observed.

Danger
Cable shields and unused power cable conductors must be connected to PE potential to
prevent capacitive cross-talk charges.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-43
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.3 Interface description

3.2.3.1 Overview

3(FRQQHFWLRQ

/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ 89:

'&3$'&1$ WRFRQQHFWD
%UDNLQJ0RGXOH RSWLRQDO

&RQQHFWLRQVIRUD '&16
GYGWILOWHU RSWLRQDO '&36

)DQV

)DQIXVHV
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ 89:
7HUPLQDOVWULS;
6HWWLQJWHUPLQDOVIRUWKHIDQWUDQVIRUPHU
3(FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 3-30 Power Module, frame size FX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-44 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3(FRQQHFWLRQ

/LQHFRQQHFWLRQ 89:

'&3$'&1$ WRFRQQHFWD
%UDNLQJ0RGXOH RSWLRQDO

&RQQHFWLRQVIRUD '&16
GYGWILOWHU RSWLRQDO '&36

)DQV

)DQ)XVHV
0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ 89:
7HUPLQDOVWULS;
6HWWLQJWHUPLQDOVIRUWKHIDQWUDQVIRUPHU
3(FRQQHFWLRQ

Figure 3-31 Power Module, frame size GX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-45
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.3.2 Sample connection

SK99$&
/
/ /
3(
SK9$&

/LQHUHDFWRU

89 : 3(

3RZHU0RGXOH
0
7\SH a
&KDVVLV
2SWLRQ
%UDNLQJ
0RGXOH
; %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
 3B 5

'&  0B 
9
  '&3$ 5

 '&1$


'&36
+ 5HDG\ 
+ '&/LQN  '&16

&RQWURO8QLW '5,9(&/L4VRFNHW

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW
¦3
;
 7HPS
 7HPS
(39

(30


89:3(

'5,9(&/L4
0
(
a

Figure 3-32 Connection example: Power Module Chassis

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-46 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.3.3 Terminal Block X9

Table 3-16 Terminal strip X9

Terminal Signal name Technical specifications


1 P24V Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: max 1.4 A
2 M
3 Reserved, do not use
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 Reserved, do not use
7 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20,8 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: 10 mA
8 EP M1 (Enable Pulses)
Signal propagation times:
L->H: 100 µs
H->L: 1000 µs

Note
For operation, 24 V DC must be connected to terminal 7 and ground to terminal 8. Upon
removal, pulse inhibit is activated.

3.2.3.4 DCPS, DCNS connection for a dv/dt filter

Table 3-17 DCPS, DCNS

Frame size Cross-section that can be connected Terminal screw


FX 1 x 35 mm² M8
GX 1 x 70 mm² M8
The connecting cable is fed-out downwards through the Power Module.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-47
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.3.5 X41 EP terminal / temperature sensor connection

Table 3-18 Terminal strip X41

Terminal Function Technical specifications


4 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130
 3 -Temp


2 are assigned
 1 are assigned

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)

Notice
The KTY temperature sensor must be connected with the correct polarity.

Note
The temperature sensor connection can be used for motors that are equipped with a KTY84-
1C130 measurement sensor in the stator windings.

3.2.3.6 DRIVE-CLiQ Interface X400-X402

Table 3-19 DRIVE-CLiQ Interface X400-X402

Pin Name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-48 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.3.7 Meaning of the LEDs on the Power Module

Table 3-20 Meaning of the LEDs on the Power Module

LED state Description


H200 H201
Off Off The electronics power supply is missing or lies outside permissible tolerance
range.
Off The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is
taking place.
Green Orange The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is
taking place. The DC link voltage is present.
Red The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication is
taking place. The DC link voltage is too high.
Orange Orange DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Red --- At least one fault is present in this component.
Flashing light 2 Hz: --- Firmware is being downloaded.
Green Red
Flashing light 2 Hz: --- Identifying whether the component is activated using the LED (p0124)
Green Orange Note:
or Both possibilities depend on the LED status when activated using p0124 = 1.
Red Orange

Warning
Independent of the state of LED "H201", hazardous DC link voltages can always be
available.
The warning information on the components must be carefully observed!

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains information about the cause of the faults and how they can
be resolved:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-49
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.4 Dimension drawings

Dimension drawing frame size FX


The cooling clearances to be maintained are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-33 Dimension drawing Power Module, frame size FX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-50 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

Dimension drawing frame size GX


The cooling clearances to be maintained are indicated by the dotted line.

Figure 3-34 Dimension drawing Power Module, frame size GX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-51
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.5 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis

Figure 3-35 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis, frame size FX

The DRIVE-CLiQ cable and the cable for the 24 V power supply must be correctly routed so
that the front flap can close.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-52 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.6 Electrical connection

Adjusting the fan voltage (-T10)


The power supply for the device fans (1-ph. 230 V AC) in the Power Module (-T10) is taken
from the line supply using transformers. The locations of the transformers are indicated in
the interface descriptions.
The transformers are fitted with primary taps so that they can be fine-tuned to the line supply
voltage. When delivered, the taps are always set to the highest level. With a low supply
voltage, the appropriate transformer tap must be activated.
The connections at the setting terminals must be connected to "0" and the line supply
voltage.

 9 9 99

Figure 3-36 Setting terminals for the fan transformers

The supply voltage assignments for making the appropriate setting on the fan transformer
are indicated in the following table (factory presetting): 480 V/0 V)

Caution
If the terminals are not changed-over to reflect the actual line supply voltage:
• The required cooling level will not provided (risk of overheating)
• The fan fuses may blow (overload)

Table 3-21 Assignment of the existing line supply voltage for setting at the fan transformer

Line supply voltage Tap at the fan transformer (-T10)


380 V ± 10 % 380 V
400 V ± 10 % 400 V
440 V ± 10 % 440 V
480 V ± 10 % 480 V

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-53
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.7 Technical data

Table 3-22 Technical data, Power Modules Chassis

Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ± 10 % (-15 % < 1 min)


Order No. 6SL3310– 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33–1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Rated output current In A 210 260 310 380 490
Base load current IH A 180 233 277 340 438
Output current A 230 285 340 430 540
for S6 duty (40%) IS6
Max. output current Imax A 307 375 453 555 715
Supply voltages
Electronics power supply VDC 24 (20,4 - 28,8)
Overvoltage trip VDC 820 ± 2 %
Undervoltage trip VDC 424
Rated power based on In kW 110 132 160 200 250
Rated power based on IH kW 90 110 132 160 200
Max. rated pulse frequency kHz 2 2 2 2 2
without derating
Max. rated pulse frequency kHz 8 8 8 8 8
with derating
Efficiency η 0.986 0.986 0.986 0.986 0.986
Power loss kW 2.46 3.27 4.0 4.54 5.78
Cooling air requirement m³/s 0.17 0.23 0.36 0.36 0.36
Sound pressure level dB(A) 66 / 67 68 / 72 68 / 72 68 / 72 68 / 72
at 50/60 Hz
Rated input current A 218 270 322 395 510
Electronics current drain A 0.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 0.9
(24 V DC)
Line supply connection Flat connector for M10 cable lug, max. connection cross section
U1, V1, W1 2 x 185 mm2
Motor connection Flat connector for M10 cable lug, max. connection cross section
U2, V2, W2 2 x 185 mm2
DC link connections DCPA, Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat
DCNA, connector for connector for connector for connector for connector for
(option Braking Module) M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug,
connection connection connection connection connection
cross section cross section cross section cross section cross section
1 x 35 mm2 1 x 35 mm2 1 x 50 mm2 1 x 50 mm2 1 x 50 mm2
DC link connections Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat
DCPS, DCNS connector for connector for connector for connector for connector for
(option dv/dt filter) M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug, M8 cable lug,
connection connection connection connection connection
cross section cross section cross section cross section cross section
1 x 35 mm2 1 x 35 mm2 1 x 70 mm2 1 x 70 mm2 1 x 70 mm2

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-54 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

Line supply voltage 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC ± 10 % (-15 % < 1 min)


Order No. 6SL3310– 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33–1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
PE connection Flat connector for M10 cable lug, max. connection cross section
2 x 185 mm2
Max. motor cable length1) m 300 (shielded)
450 (non-shielded)
Max. ambient temperature
without derating °C 40 40 40 40 40
with derating °C 55 55 55 55 55
Degree of protection IP 20 or IP 20 or IP 20 or IP 20 or IP 20 or
IPXXB IPXXB IPXXB IPXXB IPXXB
Width mm 326 326 326 326 326
Height mm 1400 1400 1533 1533 1533
Depth mm 356 356 545 545 545
Frame size FX FX GX GX GX
Weight kg 104 104 162 162 162
1) Max. motor cable length 100 m (shielded) in conjunction with a line filter to maintain the
EMC limit values of EN 61800-3 Category C2.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-55
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

3.2.7.1 Characteristics

Overload capability
The Power Modules are equipped with an overload reserve e.g. to handle breakaway
torques.
In drives with overload requirements, the appropriate base load current must, therefore, be
used as a basis for the required load.
The criterion for overload is that the drive is operated with its base load current before and
after the overload occurs (a load duration of 300 s is used as a basis here).

Low overload
The base load current for low overload IL is based on a load duty cycle of 110% for 60 s or
150% for 10 s with a load duty duration of 300 s.

&RQYHUWHUFXUUHQW

V

 ,/

/LPLWLQJVKRUWWLPHFXUUHQW

/LPLWLQJVKRUWWLPHFXUUHQW

  ,/ 5DWHGFXUUHQW FRQWLQXRXV 


%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,/IRUORZRYHUORDG

,/
V
V

W

Figure 3-37 Low overload

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-56 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

High overload
The base load current for high overload IH is based on a load duty cycle of 150% for 60 s or
160% for 10 s with a load duty duration of 300 s.

&RQYHUWHUFXUUHQW

V /LPLWLQJVKRUWWLPHFXUUHQW
  ,+
/LPLWLQJVKRUWWLPHFXUUHQW
  ,+

5DWHGFXUUHQW FRQWLQXRXV 

%DVHORDGFXUUHQW,+IRUKLJKRYHUORDG

,+
V
V

W

Figure 3-38 High overload

3.2.7.2 Current de-rating as a function of the pulse frequency


When the pulse frequency is increased, the derating factor of the output current must be
taken into account.
This derating factor must be applied to the currents specified in the technical data.

Table 3-23 Derating factor of the output current as a function of the pulse frequency

Order No. Output current Permissible Derating factor Derating factor


6SL3310-... for a pulse frequency of output current for a pulse frequency of for a pulse frequency of
2 kHz [A] for a pulse frequency of 4 kHz 8 kHz
2.5 kHz
as a % of In
1TE32-1AA0 210 95 % 82 % 50 %
1TE32-6AA0 260 95 % 83 % 50 %
1TE33-1AA0 310 97 % 88 % 50 %
1TE33-8AA0 380 96 % 87 % 50 %
1TE35-0AA0 490 94 % 78 % 50 %

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-57
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency


By multiplying the rated pulse frequency with a multiple integer, the following output
frequencies can be achieved taking into account the derating factors:

Table 3-24 Maximum output frequencies achieved by increasing the pulse frequency

Pulse frequency [kHz] Maximum output frequency [Hz]


2 160
4 320 1
8 640 1
1 Due to the closed-loop control, the maximum output frequency is limited to 300 Hz.




&RUUHFWLRQIDFWRUN 7










¡&

$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH

Figure 3-39 Current correction factor as a function of ambient temperature

Note: A factor kT > 1.0 is only to be taken into account in conjunction with the current de-
rating factor depending on the installation altitude.

 
3HUPLVVLEOHFRQWLQXRXVFXUUHQW

 0.95
DVDRIWKHUDWHGFXUUHQW

&RUUHFWLRQIDFWRUN,

 0.90

 0.85
 1000 2000 3000 m 4000

,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH
DERYHVHDOHYHO

Figure 3-40 Current correction factor as a function of installation altitude

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-58 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

 

&RUUHFWLRQIDFWRUN8
3HUPLVVLEOHLQSXWYROWDJHDVD
 

RIWKHUDWHGYROWDJH
 

 
    P 

,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH
DERYHVHDOHYHO

Figure 3-41 Voltage correction factor as a function of installation altitude

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 3-59
Power Modules
3.2 Power Modules Chassis

Equipment Manual AC Drive


3-60 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components 4
4.1 4.1 Blocksize

4.1.1 Braking resistors

4.1.1.1 Description
The PM340 Power Modules cannot regenerate into the line supply. For the regenerative
operation, e.g. the braking of a rotating mass, a braking resistor must be connected to
convert the resulting energy into heat.
The braking resistor is connected at terminals DCP/R1 and R2.
The braking resistors can be installed at the side next to the PM340 Power Modules. The
braking resistors for A and B frame sizes are designed as sub-chassis components. If the
PM340 Power Modules of the A or B frame sizes are operated without line reactor, the
braking resistors can also be installed under the Power Modules.
The braking resistors for the Power Modules of the C to F frame sizes should be placed
outside the switchgear cabinet or outside the switchgear room in order to conduct the
resulting heat loss away from the Power Modules. This reduces the level of air conditioning
required.
A temperature protection switch monitors the braking resistor for overtemperature and issues
a signal on a floating contact if the limit value is exceeded.

4.1.1.2 Safety information

Caution
The surface temperature of the braking resistors may exceed 80 °C.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-1
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

Protecting the resistance


The power supply to the Power Modules must be established through a contactor which can
then shut down the power supply when the resistor overheats.
A temperature protection switch handles the protective function (this is supplied with each
break resistor). This is connected in series with the coil feeder cable for the main contactor.
The contacts of the temperature protection switch close again as soon as the resistor
temperature has fallen below the selected value.

3( / / /


9'&
0D[
9$&

&RQWDFWRU

// 1/ /

%'&

7
UHVLVWRU
%UDNLQJ

7

%

7HPSHUDWXUH
3URWHFWLYHFLUFXLWEUHDNHU

Figure 4-1 Connection example: Braking resistor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

4.1.1.3 Dimension drawings

'

/ /

:

Figure 4-2 Dimension drawing: Braking resistor, frame sizes A and B

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-3
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

Figure 4-3 Dimension drawing: Braking resistors, frame sizes C, D, E, F

Table 4-1 Dimension data: Braking resistor, all data in mm and (inches), Part 1

Order No. 4BC05-0AA0 4BD11-0AA0 4BD12-0BA0 4BD16-5CA0


6SE6400-
Frame size A A B C
L 230 (9.05) 230 (9.05) 239 (9.40) 285 (11.22)
L1 217 (8.54) 217 (8.54) 226 (8.89) 200 (7.87)
L2 - - - 145 (5.70)
L3 - - - 170 (6.69)
D 43.5 (1.71) 43.5 (1.71) 43.5 (1.71) 150 (5.90)
D1 - - - 217 (8.54)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

Order No. 4BC05-0AA0 4BD11-0AA0 4BD12-0BA0 4BD16-5CA0


6SE6400-
Frame size A A B C
D2 - - - 185 (7.28)
W 72 (2.83) 72 (2.83) 149 (5.86) 185 (7.28)
W1 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20) 138 (5.43) 230 (9.05)

Table 4-2 Dimension data: Braking resistor, all data in mm and (inches), Part 2

Order No. 4BD21-2DA0 4BD22-2EA0 4BD24-0FA0


6SE6400-
Frame size D E F
L 515 (20.27) 645 (25.39) 650 (25.59)
L1 350 (13.77) 480 (18.89) 510 (20.07)
L2 205 (8.07) 205 (8.07) 270 (10.62)
L3 195 (7.67) 195 (7.67) 335 (13.18)
D 175 (6.88) 175 (6.88) 315 (12.40)
D1 242 (9.52) 242 (9.52) 382 (15.03)
D2 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 382 (15.03)
W 270 (10.62) 270 (10.62) 400 (15.74)
W1 315 (12.40) 315 (12.40) 435 (17.12)

4.1.1.4 Mounting
The braking resistor is connected at terminals DCP/R1 and R2.
The braking resistors can be installed at the side next to the PM340 Power Modules. The
braking resistors for A and B frame sizes are designed as sub-chassis components. If the
PM340 Power Modules of the A or B frame sizes are operated without line reactor, the
braking resistors can also be installed under the Power Modules.
The braking resistor is positioned outside the cabinet or switchgear room. This enables the
resulting heat loss around the Power Modules / Motor Modules to be dissipated, This
reduces the level of air conditioning required.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-5
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

4.1.1.5 Technical data

Table 4-3 Technical data, braking resistors, Part 1

Order No. 6SE6400-4BC05- 6SE6400-4BD11- 6SL3201-0BE12- 6SE6400-4BD16-


0AA0 0AA0 0AA0 5CA0
Resistance Ohm 180 390 160 56
Rated power PDB kW 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.65
Peak power Pmax kW 1 1.7 4.0 13
Load duration for peak power Ta s 27.6 13.8 12.6 13.1
Period duration of braking duty cycle t s 276 276 252 262
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Power Connections Cable 3 x 2.5 mm 2 Cable 3 x 2.5 mm 2 Cable 3 x 2.5 mm 2 Cable 3 x 2.5 mm2
shielded, shielded, shielded, shielded,
length 0.4 m length 0.5 m length 0.5 m length 0.9 m
Thermoswitch (NC contact) 250 VAC / 2.5 A 250 VAC / 2.5 A 250 VAC / 2.5 A 250 VAC / 2.5 A
maximum contact load
connecting cable
Weight kg 1.0 1.0 1.6 3.8

Table 4-4 Technical data, braking resistors, Part 2

Order No. 6SE6 4BD21-2DA0 4BD22-2EA0 4BD24-0FA0


400-
Resistance Ohm 27 15 8.2
Rated power PDB kW 1.2 2.2 4.0
Peak power Pmax kW 24 44 80
Load duration for peak power Ta s 13.6 14.5 13.1
Period duration of braking duty cycle t s 271 290 252
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Power Connections M6 studs M6 studs M6 studs
Thermoswitch (NC contact) 250 VAC / 2.5 A 250 VAC / 2.5 A 250 VAC / 0.2 A
maximum contact load
connecting cable
Weight kg 7.4 10.6 16.7

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.1 Blocksize

3
PD[

3
'%

7D W
7

Figure 4-4 Load diagram for the braking resistor, Blocksize format

T [s] period duration of braking duty cycle


Ta [s] load duration for peak power
PDB [W] rated power of the braking resistor
Pmax [W] peak braking power of the braking resistor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-7
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2 4.2 Chassis

4.2.1 Braking Modules

4.2.1.1 Description
A Braking Module (and an external braking resistor) is required in certain cases when the
drive is to be braked or brought to a standstill (e.g. EMERGENCY SWITCHING-OFF
Category 1). The Braking Module contains the power electronics and the associated control.
The supply voltage for the electronics is taken from the DC link.
During operation, the DC link energy is converted to heat loss in an external braking resistor.
A mounting slot is provided in the Power Module.

Design
The Braking Module in chassis format is installed in a slot within the Power Module and
force-cooled by its fan. The Braking Module is connected to the DC link by means of flexible
cables, which are supplied as standard.
The Braking Module has as standard, the following interfaces:
• The DC link is connected through flexible cables
• Connecting terminal for external braking resistor
• 1 digital input (inhibit Braking Module with high signal/acknowledge error with negative
edge high low)
• 1 digital output (Braking Module defective)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.2 Safety information

Danger
After disconnecting all the supply voltages, a hazardous voltage will be present in all
components for another 5 minutes. Work may not be carried out on the components until
after this time has elapsed.
Before starting work, you should also measure the voltage after the 5 minutes have elapsed!
The voltage can be measured on DC link terminals DCP and DCN.

Danger
The DC link discharge voltage hazard warning in the local language must be attached to all
of the components.

Danger
The connection to the braking resistors must be short-circuit/ground-fault proof.

Warning
If braking resistors are used that have not been released by SIEMENS for SINAMICS, then
the braking resistors could be destroyed.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-9
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.3 Braking Module for frame size FX

5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV

;

7KUHVKROGVZLWFK
6
5

5

'&3$

'&1$

Figure 4-5 Braking Module for Power Module, frame size FX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.4 Braking Module for type GX

5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV

;

7KUHVKROGVZLWFK
6

5
5

'&3$

'&1$

Figure 4-6 Braking Module for Power Module, frame size GX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-11
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.5 Sample connection

%UDNLQJ0RGXOH

9



)DXOWRXWSXWV )DXOW


9


,QKLELWLQSXW

 ,QKLELW
9


6KLHOG


; %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU

'&3$ 5
&RQQHFWLRQDWWKH &RQQHFWLQJWKH
'&OLQN %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
'&31 5

Figure 4-7 Example connection of Braking Module

4.2.1.6 Braking resistor connection X1

Table 4-5 Braking resistor connection

Terminal Designation
R1 Braking resistor connection R+
R2 Break resistor connection R-
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 50 mm 2

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.7 X21 digital inputs/outputs

Table 4-6 Terminal block X21

Terminal Designation 1) Technical specifications


6 +24 V Voltage: +18 V to 30 V
Typical current consumption (own current consumption): 10 mA at 24 V DC
 

5 DO fault output Voltage: 24 V DC


Load current: 0.5 mA to 0.6 mA
4 0V
 

3 DI inhibit input High signal level: +15 V to 30 V




Current drain: 2 mA to 15 mA
2 0V


Low signal level: -3 V to 5 V


1 Shield Shield connection for terminal 2 ... 6
Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm2
1) DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output

Note
Applying a high signal to terminal X21.3 inhibits the Braking Module. On a falling edge,
pending error signals are acknowledged.

4.2.1.8 S1 threshold value switch


The response threshold at which the Braking Module is activated and the DC link voltage
generated during braking are specified in the following table.

Warning
The threshold switch must only be used when the Power Module is switched off and the DC
link capacitors are discharged.

Table 4-7 Response thresholds of the Braking Modules

Response threshold Switch position Comment


774 V 1 774 V is the default factory setting. With supply voltages of between
3-ph. 380 V and 400 V AC, the response threshold can be set to 673 V to
673 V 2
reduce the voltage stress on the motor and converter. This does, however,
reduce the possible peak power P15 with the square of the voltage
(677/774)² = 0.75.
The possible peak power is, therefore, max. 75 % of P15.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-13
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.9 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size FX

Figure 4-8 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size FX – steps 1 - 3

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Figure 4-9 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size FX – steps 4 - 6

Installing the Braking Module


The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagrams in
front of them.
1. Unscrew the 2 M6 screws from the front cover and lift off the cover.
2. Unscrew the 2 screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the 1 M6 nut on the left-hand side.
Remove the left-hand cover.
3. Unscrew the 4 screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the 3 screws from the rear cut-out sections.
Remove the top cover.
4. Unscrew the 3 screws for the blanking plate.
Remove the plate.
5. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the 3 screws
(step 4).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-15
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

6. Secure the connection cable to the DC link with 2 screws (Braking Module connection)
and 2 nuts (DC link connection).
Carry out the subsequent steps in reverse order from steps 1 – 3.
An opening above the connections for the braking resistor (R1, R2) is provided in the cover
for connecting the cable to the braking resistor.

Note
You must observe the specified tightening torques.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.1.10 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size GX

Figure 4-10 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size GX – steps 1 - 3

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-17
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Figure 4-11 Installing a Braking Module in a Power Module, frame size GX – steps 4 - 6

Installing the Braking Module


The steps for the installation procedure are numbered in accordance with the diagrams in
front of them.
1. Unscrew the 2 M6 screws from the front cover and lift off the cover.
2. Unscrew the 2 screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the 1 M6 nut on the left-hand side.
Remove the left-hand cover.
3. Unscrew the 4 screws from the upper cover plate.
Unscrew the 3 screws from the rear cut-out sections.
Remove the top cover.
4. Unscrew the 3 screws for the blanking plate.
Remove the plate.
5. Insert the Braking Module where the cover used to be and secure it using the 3 screws
(step 4).
6. Secure the connection cable to the DC link with 2 screws (Braking Module connection)
and 2 nuts (DC link connection).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Carry out the subsequent steps in reverse order from steps 1 – 3.


An opening above the connections for the braking resistor (R1, R2) is provided in the cover
for connecting the cable to the braking resistor.

Note
You must observe the specified tightening torques.

4.2.1.11 Technical data

Table 4-8 Technical data, Braking Modules

Order No. 6SL3300–1AE31-3AA0 6SL3300–1AE32-5AA0


Suitable for installation in Power Modules, frame size FX GX
PDB power (rated power) 25 kW 50 kW
P15 power (peak power) 125 kW 250 kW
P20 power 100 kW 200 kW
P40 power 50 kW 100 kW
Variable response thresholds 774 V (673 V) 774 V (673 V)
Digital input
Rated voltage -3 V to 30 V -3 V to 30 V
Low level (an open digital input is interpreted as "low") -3 V to 5 V -3 V to 5 V
High level 15 V to 30 V 15 V to 30 V
Current drain (typical at 24 V DC) 10 mA 10 mA
Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm² (AWG 14) 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)
Digital output (continued-short-circuit-proof)
Rated voltage 24 V DC 24 V DC
Max. load current of the digital output 500 mA 500 mA
Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm² (AWG 14) 1.5 mm² (AWG 14)
R1/R2 connection M8 screw M8 screw
Max. connection cross-section R1/R2 35 mm² 50 mm²
Weight 3.6 kg 7.3 kg

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-19
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

4.2.2 Braking resistors

4.2.2.1 Description
The braking resistor is used to reduce the excess DC link energy in regenerative operation.
The braking resistor is connected to the Braking Module. The braking resistor is mounted
outside the cabinet or switchgear room. This means that the resulting heat loss around the
Power Module can be dissipated - and cooling costs/equipment reduced.
Resistors with rated powers of 25 kW and 50 kW are available.
Braking resistors can be used on Power Modules with a voltage range. This is the reason
that the voltage can be changed by setting the response thresholds at the Braking Module to
reduce the voltage stress on the motor and Power Module.
A temperature protection switch monitors the braking resistor for overtemperature and issues
a signal on a floating contact if the limit value is exceeded.

4.2.2.2 Safety information

Caution
A cooling clearance of 200 m must be maintained on all sides of the component (with
ventilation meshes).

Danger
The braking resistor cables must be laid in such a way that they are short-circuit and ground-
fault proof!

Caution
The connecting cables to the Braking Module in the Power Module must be kept as short as
possible (max. 50 m).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Danger
The braking resistors are only suitable for mounting in a vertical position. They are not
suitable for mounting on a wall.
Sufficient space must be available for dissipating the energy converted by the braking
resistor.
A sufficient distance from flammable objects must be maintained.
The braking resistor must be installed as a free-standing unit.
Objects must not be placed on or anywhere above the braking resistor.
The braking resistor should not be installed underneath fire detection systems, since these
could be triggered by the resulting heat.
The surface temperature of the braking resistors may exceed 80 °C.

4.2.2.3 Dimension drawing

7\SHSODWH
77
6FUHZWHUPLQDO
0 PP£


 

0 [
 6WXG

*URXQG 0
FRQQHFWLRQ 
0
 
   


Figure 4-12 Dimension drawing, 25 kW/125 kW resistor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-21
DC link components
4.2 Chassis



7\SHSODWH



[
6WXG
0
0

0  77


*URXQG 6FUHZWHUPLQDO

FRQQHFWLRQ PP£

0
  

  


Figure 4-13 Dimension drawing, 50 kW/250 kW resistor

4.2.2.4 Technical data

Table 4-9 What are the technical data of the braking resistors

Order No. Units 6SL3000–1BE31-3AA0 6SL3000–1BE32-5AA0


PDB power (rated power) kW 25 50
P15 power (peak power) kW 125 250
Max. current A 189 378
Cable entry Via cable gland M50 Via cable gland M50
Line connection Via stud M10 Via stud M10
Max. cable cross-section that can be mm² 50 70
connected
Degree of protection IP 20 IP 20
Width x height x depth mm 740 x 605 x 485 740 x 1325 x 485
Weight kg 50 120

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Duty cycle

33'% 3'% FRQWLQXRXVEUDNLQJSRZHU


3 [3'% SRZHUWKDWLVSHUPLVVLEOHIRUVHYHU\V
3 [3'% SRZHUWKDWLVSHUPLVVLEOHIRUVHYHU\V
 3 [3'% SRZHUWKDWLVSHUPLVVLEOHIRUVHYHU\V

3 

3 



3 

3'% 

             WV

Figure 4-14 Duty cycle for braking resistors

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 4-23
DC link components
4.2 Chassis

Equipment Manual AC Drive


4-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components 5
5.1 5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.1 Blocksize

5.1.1.1 Description
Motor reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings by reducing the voltage
gradients at the motor terminals that occur when motors are fed from drive converters. At the
same time, the capacitive re-charging currents that additionally load the output of the Power
Module when longer motor cables are used are simultaneously reduced.
The motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC are suitable for a pulse
frequency of 4 kHz. Higher pulse frequencies are not permissible.

5.1.1.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Caution
When using motor reactors that SIEMENS has not approved for SINAMICS, then these can
thermally damage the reactor.

Caution
The surface temperature of the motor reactors can exceed 80 °C.

Caution
The maximum permissible output frequency when motor reactors are used is 150 Hz.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-1
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.1.3 Dimension drawings

& %

Figure 5-1 Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size A

Table 5-1 Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame size A, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 3TC00-4AD3 3TC00-4AD2


6SE6400-
Frame size A A
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 75.5 (2.97) 7.5 (0.29)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 50 (1.96) 110 (4.33)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

&

)UDPHVL]H&
%

&

$
)UDPHVL]H%

Figure 5-2 Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame sizes B and C

Table 5-2 Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame sizes B and C

Motor reactor
6SL3202- 0AE21-0CA0 0AJ23-2CA0

Frame size B C
Dimension A in mm and (inches) 270 (10.62) 334 (13.14)
Dimension B in mm and (inches) 153 (6.02) 189 (7.44)
Dimension C in mm and (inches) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.96)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-3
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

H
3UHVVXUHHOHPHQWGHVLJQDWLRQSODWHDQGWHUPLQDO
RQO\IRUYHUVLRQZLWKWHPSHUDWXUHPRQLWRULQJ H H

 


E

0
PD[ 

E


 
 

0RXQWLQJKROH
   E
3URWHFWLYH
HDUWK E
FRQGXFWRU   
FRQQHFWLRQ
0[

Figure 5-3 Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size D

H
   H H
0 E

PD[  

E

0RXQWLQJKROH


  3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU

FRQQHFWLRQ
 
0[
   E
   E
PD[  

Figure 5-4 Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

H
   H H


0

PD[  

E
 
 
E

   E 0RXQWLQJKROH


E 
  

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
FRQQHFWLRQ
0[

Figure 5-5 Dimension drawing: Motor reactor, frame size F

Table 5-3 Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame size D, E, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor
6SE6400- 3TC05-4DD0 3TC03-8DD0 3TC07-5ED0 3TC08-0ED0

Frame size D D E E
b1 70 (2.75) 94 (3.70) 101 (3.97) 70 (2.75)
b2 91 (3.58) 115 (4.52) 133 (5.23) 90 (3.54)
b3 70 (2.75) 94 (3.70) 101 (3.97) 70 (2.75)
b4 176 (6.92) 176 (6.92) 200 (7.87) 176 (6.92)
e1 91 (3.58) 103 (4.05) 110 (4.33) 89 ± 2 (3.50 ± 0.07)
e2 57 (2.24) 69 (2.71) 76 (2.99) 79 ± 2 (3.50 ± 0.07)
e3 49 (1.92) 61 (2.40) 68 (2.67) -

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-5
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Table 5-4 Total dimensions: Motor reactor, frame size F, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor
6SE6400- 3TC06-2FE0 3TC08-8FE0 3TC14-5FD0 3TC15-4FD0

Frame size F F F F
b1 118 (4.64) 138 (5.43) 138 (5.43) 101 (3.97)
b2 138 (5.43) 158 (6.22) 169 (6.65) 121 (4.76)
b3 118 (4.64) 138 (5.43) 138 (5.43) 101 (3.97)
b4 224 (8.81) 264 (10.39) 264 (10.39) 200 (7.87)
e1 124 ± 2 (4.88 ± 0.07) 134 ± 2 (5.27 ± 0.07) 131 (5.15) 119 ± 2 (4.68 ± 0.07)
e2 114 ± 2 (4.48 ± 0.07) 124 ± 2 (4.88 ± 0.07) 90 (3.54) 109 ± 2 (4.29 ± 0.07)
e3 - - 78 (3.07) -

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.1.4 Mounting
The motor reactor must be installed as close as possible to the Power Module.

Figure 5-6 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame size A

Table 5-5 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame size A, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 3TC00-4AD3 3TC00-4AD2


6SE6400-
Suitable for Power Modules 1SB11-0UA0 1SE11-3UA0
6SL3210- 1SE11-7UA0
1SE12-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
Frame size A A
H 160 (6.29) 160 (6.29)
I 56 (2.20) 56 (2.20)
J 187 (7.36) 187 (7.36)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-7
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

)UDPHVL]H&

-
+

)UDPHVL]H% -

Figure 5-7 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame sizes B and C

Table 5-6 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame size B and C, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 6SL3202- 0AE21-0CA0 0AJ23-2CA0


Suitable 6SL3210- 1SE16-0UA0 1SE21-8UA0
for Power Module 1SE17-7UA0 1SE22-5UA0
1SE21-0UA0 1SE23-2UA0
Frame size B C
Power Module G 138 (5.43) 174 (6.85)
H 174 (6.85) 204 (8.03)
Mounting surface I 120 (4.72) 156 (6.14)
J 200 (7.87) 232 (9.13)
Mounting screw M4 M5

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Cable cross-section and terminal tightening torques


Terminals for wiring on site

Frame size A B C
Tightening torque [Nm] 1.1 1.5 2.25
Recommended 1 1.5 2.5
minimum conductor cross-section [mm2]
Highest conductor cross-section [mm2] 2.5 6 10

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-9
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Figure 5-8 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame sizes D, E, F

Table 5-7 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame sizes D, E, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 6SE6400- 3TC05-4DD0 3TC03-8DD0 3TC05-4DD0 3TC07-5ED0 3TC08-0ED0


Suitable for 6SL3210- 1SE23-8UA0 1SE24-5UA0 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0 1SE31-0UA0
Power Module
Frame size D D D E E
Motor reactor H 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 210 (8.26) 248 (9.76)
W 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85) 270 (10.62)
D 150 (5.90) 179 (7.04) 179 (7.04) 150 (5.90) 209 (8.22)
Mounting n1 70 (2.75) 94 (3.70) 94 (3.70) 70 (2.75) 101 (3.97)
dimensions n2 176 (6.29) 176 (6.92) 176 (6.92) 176 (6.92) 200 (7.87)
Mounting screw H M6 M6 M6 M6 M8
Tightening torque 3.5-4.0 3.5-4.0 3.5-4.0 4.8-5.0 4.8-5.0
[Nm]

Table 5-8 Mounting: Motor reactor, frame size F, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 6SE6400- 3TC06-2FE0 3TC08-8FE0 3TC14-5FD0 3TC15-4FD0


Suitable for Power 6SL3210- ? ? 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-5UA0
Module
Frame size F F F F
Motor reactor H 248 (9.76) 321 (12.63) 269 (10.59) 321 (12.63)
W 270 (10.62) 350 (13.77) 300 (11.81) 350 (13.77)
D 209 (8.22) 288 (11.33) 220 (8.66) 288 (11.33)
Mounting dimensions n1 101 (3.97) 138 (5.43) 118 (4.64) 138 (5.43)
n2 200 (7.87) 264 (10.39) 224 (8.81) 264 (10.39)
Mounting screw H M8 M8 M8 M8
Tightening torque 9.5-10.0 9.5-10.0 4.8-5.0 9.5-10.0
[Nm]

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Mounting Power Modules and motor reactors

Figure 5-9 Mounting Power Modules and motor reactors, frame sizes B and C

Table 5-9 Total dimensions, Power Module 340 and motor reactor, frame sizes A, B and C, all data in mm and (inches)

Motor reactor 6SE6400-3TC00-4AD3 6SE6400-3TC00-4AD2 6SL3202-0AE21-0CA0 6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0


Suitable for 6SL3210- 1SB11-0UA0 1SE11-3UA0 1SE16-0UA0 1SE21-8UA0
Power Module 1SE11-7UA0 1SE17-7UA0 1SE22-5UA0
1SE12-2UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE23-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
Frame size A A B C
Total D 200 (7.87) 200 (7.87) 270 (10.62) 334 (13.14)
dimension of
E 75.5 (2.97) 75.5 (2.97) 153 (6.02) 189 (7.44)
the Power
Module and F 259 (10.19) 259 (10.19) 235 (9.25) 245 (9.64)
motor reactor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-11
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.1.5 Electrical connection

3(FRQQHFWLRQ

0RWRUUHDFWRU

Figure 5-10 Electrical connection

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.1.6 Technical data

Table 5-10 Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, Part 1

Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)


6SE6400-3TC00-4AD2 6SL3202-
0AE21-0CA0
Rated current A 4.5 10
Power loss kW 0.005 0.02
Connection to the Cable 4 x 1.5 mm2 Cable
Power Module Length approx. 0.3 m 4 x AWG14
(1.5 mm2)
Length approx.
0.4 m
Motor connection Screw terminals for cable cross-section 6 mm2 Screw
terminals for
cable cross-
section 6 mm2
PE connection M5 stud M5 stud
Max. permissible m 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded)
cable length between 150 (non- 150 (non- 150 (non- 225 (non- 225 (non- 150 (non-
motor reactor and shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded)
motor
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB
Weight, approx. kg 2 4.5
Suitable for Power Type 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210-
Module, Blocksize 1SE11-3UA0 1SE11-7UA0 1SE12-2UA0 1SE13-1UA0 1SE14-1UA0 1SE16-0UA0
format 6SL3210-
1SE16-0AA0
Rated current In A 1.3 1.7 2.2 3.1 4.1 5.9
(power) of the Power
Module
Frame size A A A A A B

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-13
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Table 5-11 Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, Part 2

Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)


6SL3202-0AE21-0CA0 6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0 6SE6400-
3TC05-4DD0
Rated current A 10 25 68
Power loss kW 0.02 0.06 0.2
Connection to the Cable 4 x AWG14 (1.5 mm2) Cable 4 x AWG14 (1.5 mm2) Flat terminator
Power Module Length approx. 0.4 m Length approx. 0.35 m for M6 cable
lug
Motor connection Screw terminals Screw terminals Flat terminator
for cable cross-section 6 mm2 for cable cross-sections 2.5 to 10 mm2 for M6 cable
lug
PE connection M5 stud M5 stud M6 screw
Max. permissible m 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 100 (shielded) 200 (shielded)
cable length between 150 (non- 150 (non- 150 (non- 150 (non- 150 (non- 300 (non-
motor reactor and shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded)
motor

Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB IP20 or IPXXB IP00


Weight, approx. kg 4.5 9 11.5
Suitable for Power Type 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210-
Module, Blocksize 1SE17-7UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE21-8UA0 1SE22-5UA0 1SE23-2UA0 1SE23-8UA0
format 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210-
1SE17-7AA0 1SE21-0AA0 1SE21-8AA0 1SE22-5AA0 1SE23-2AA0 1SE23-8AA0
Rated current In A 7.7 10 18 25 32 38
(power) of the Power
Module
Frame size B B C C C D

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Table 5-12 Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, Part 3

Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)


6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SE6400- 6SE6400-
3TC03-8DD0 3TC05-4DD0 3TC08-0ED0 3TC07-5ED0 3TC14-5FD0 3TC15-4FD0
Rated current A 45 68 104 90 178 178
Power loss kW 0.2 0.2 0.17 0.28 0.47 0.25
Connection to the Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator
Power Module for M6 cable for M6 cable for M6 cable for M6 cable for M8 cable for M8 cable
lug lug lug lug lug lug
Motor connection Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator Flat terminator
for M6 cable for M6 cable for M6 cable for M6 cable for M8 cable for M8 cable
lug lug lug lug lug lug
PE connection M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M6 screw M8 screw M6 screw
Max. permissible m
cable length between
the motor reactor and
motor
for line supply 200 (shielded) 200 (shielded) 200 (shielded) 200 (shielded) 200 (shielded) 200 (shielded)
voltages
380 V to 400 V
for line supply 300 (non- 300 (non- 300 (non- 300 (non- 300 (non- 300 (non-
voltages shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded) shielded)
401 V to 480 V
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00 IP00
Weight, approx. kg 19 11.5 12 27 57 24
Suitable for Power Type 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210-
Module, Blocksize 1SE24-5UA0 1SE26-0UA0 1SE27-5UA0 1SE31-0UA0 1SE31-1UA0 1SE31-5UA0
format 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210- 6SL3210-
1SE24-5AA0 1SE26-0AA0 1SE27-5AA0 1SE31-0AA0 1SE31-1AA0 1SE31-5AA0
Rated current In A 45 60 75 90 110 145
(power) of the Power
Module
Frame size D D E E F F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-15
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Table 5-13 Motor reactors for Power Modules 3-ph. 380 V to 480 V AC, Part 4

Motor reactor (for a 4 kHz pulse frequency)


6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
Rated current A 178
Power loss kW 0.47
Connection to the Power Module Flat terminator for M8 cable lug
Motor connection Flat terminator for M8 cable lug
PE connection M8 screw
Max. permissible cable length between the motor reactor and motor m
for line supply voltages 380 V to 400 V 200 (shielded)
for line supply voltages 401 V to 480 V 300 (non-shielded)
Degree of protection IP00
Weight, approx. kg 57
Suitable for Power Module, Blocksize format Type 6SL3210-1SE31-8UA0
6SL3210-1SE31-8AA0
Rated current In (power) of the Power Module A 178
Frame size F

5.1.2 Chassis

5.1.2.1 Description
Motor reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings by reducing the voltage
gradients at the motor terminals that occur when motors are fed from drive converters. At the
same time, the capacitive re-charging currents that additionally load the output of the Power
Module when longer motor cables are used are simultaneously reduced.

5.1.2.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Caution
When using motor reactors that SIEMENS has not approved for SINAMICS, then these can
thermally damage the reactor.

Caution
The surface temperature of the motor reactors can exceed 80 °C.

Caution
The maximum permissible output frequency when motor reactors are used is 150 Hz.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

5.1.2.3 Dimension drawing


l4

l5 l5

a2
a5 a4 Mounting hole

a4
d3

n1
n2 n2

a4
h2
hmax

Type 1 Type 2
h2

a3
a3
h3

h3

n1 n4

n3

Figure 5-11 Dimension drawing, motor reactor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-17
Motor-side power components
5.1 Motor reactors

Table 5-14 Dimensions of motor reactors, all data in mm and (inches)

6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE33-8AA0 2BE35-0AA0


Connection type 1 1 1 1 2
a2 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18)
a3 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 5 (0.19) 6 (0.23)
a4 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 12.5 (0.49) 15 (0.59)
a5 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 14 (0.55)
I4 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81)
I5 100 (3.93) 100 (3.93) 100 (3.93) 100 (3.93) 100 (3.93)
hmax 285 (11.22) 315 (12.40) 285 (11.22) 285 (11.22) 365 (14.37)
h2 194 (7.63) 227 (8.93) 194 (7.63) 194 (7.63) 245 (9.64)
h3 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36)
n1 1) 163 (6.41) 183 (7.20) 163 (6.41) 183 (7.20) 183 (7.20)
n2 1) 224 (8.81) 224 (8.81) 224 (8.81) 224 (8.81) 224 (8.81)
n3 257 (10.11) 277 (10.90) 257 (10.11) 277 (10.90) 277 (10.90)
n4 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11) 79 (3.11)
d3 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8

1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

5.1.2.4 Technical data

Table 5-15 Technical data, motor reactors

Order No. 6SL3000- 2BE32-1AA0 2BE32-6AA0 2BE33-2AA0 2BE33-8AA0 2BE35-0AA0


Suitable for 6SL3310- 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33-1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Power Module
Rated power of the Power kW 110 132 160 200 250
Module
Rated current A 210 260 310 380 490
Power loss kW 0.486 0.5 0.47 0.5 0.5
Connections
- to the Power Module M10 M10 M10 M10 M12
- to the load M10 M10 M10 M10 M12
- PE M8 M8 M8 M8 M8
Degree of protection IP 00 IP 00 IP 00 IP 00 IP 00
Dimensions
Width mm 300 300 300 300 300
Height mm 285 315 285 285 365
Depth mm 257 277 257 277 277
Weight kg 66 66 66 73 100

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.2 Sinusoidal filter

5.2 5.2 Sinusoidal filter

5.2.1 Chassis

5.2.1.1 Description
The sinusoidal filter at the output of the Power Module supplies voltages that are virtually
sinusoidal at the motor, thereby enabling standard motors to be used without shielded cables
and without the need to reduce the power. Non-shielded cables can be used and, if long
motor supply cables are used, no additional motor reactors are required.
Sinusoidal filters with a power rating of up to 200 kW are available
The pulse frequency of the Motor Modules must be set to 4 kHz for the sinusoidal filters. This
reduces the output current of the Power Module, refer to Chapter Technical data.
When a sinusoidal filter is used, the available output voltage decreases by 15 %.

5.2.1.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The connecting cables to the Power Module must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Caution
Using sinusoidal filters that have not been approved by SIEMENS for SINAMICS can:
• damage/destroy the Power Modules
• cause line harmonics that may interfere with or damage other loads connected to the
same line supply.

Caution
The sinusoidal filters can have surface temperatures of over 80 °C.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-19
Motor-side power components
5.2 Sinusoidal filter

5.2.1.3 Dimension drawing


%

O O

G

Q Q Q

0RXQWLQJKROH
G
K

G
+

Q

Q Q
K

Q

Figure 5-12 Dimension drawing, sinusoidal filter

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.2 Sinusoidal filter

Table 5-16 Dimensions of the sinusoidal filters, all data in mm and (inches)

6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE33-3AA0 2CE34-1AA0


B 620 (24.40) 620 (24.40) 620 (24.40) 620 (24.40)
H 320 (12.59) 320 (12.59) 360 (14.17) 360 (14.17)
T 300 (11.81) 300 (11.81) 370 (14.56) 370 (14.56)
I1 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51)
h1 180 (7.08) 180 (7.08) 220 (8.66) 220 (8.66)
h2 65 (3.34) 65 (3.34) 65 (3.34) 65 (3.34)
n1 1) 280 (11.02) 280 (11.02) 320 (12.59) 320 (12.59)
n2 1) 150 (5.90) 150 (5.90) 150 (5.90) 150 (5.90)
n3 1) 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85) 225 (8.85)
n4 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13)
d1 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)
d2 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43)
d3 22 (0.86) 22 (0.86) 22 (0.86) 22 (0.86)
1) The lengths n1, n2 and n3 correspond to the drill hole spacing

5.2.1.4 Technical data

Table 5-17 Technical data, sinusoidal filter

Order No. 6SL3000- 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-3AA0 2CE32-8AA0 2CE33-3AA0 2CE34-1AA0


Suitable for 6SL3310- 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33-1AA0 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Power Module
Power rating of the Power kW 90 110 132 160 200
Module at a 4 kHz pulse
frequency
Output current A 225 225 276 333 408
at a 4 kHz pulse
frequency
Power loss
- at 50 Hz kW 0.35 0.35 0.4 0.245 0.38
- at 100 Hz kW 0.6 0.6 0.69 0.53 0.7
Connections
- to the Power Module M10 connecting lugs
- to the load M10 connecting lugs
Degree of protection IP 00 IP 00 IP 00 IP 00 IP 00
Dimensions
Width mm 620 620 620 620 620
Height mm 300 300 300 370 370
Depth mm 320 320 320 360 360
Weight, approx. kg 124 124 127 136 198

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-21
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3 5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3.1 Chassis

5.3.1.1 Description
The dv/dt filter plus VPL (Voltage Peak Limiter) consists of two components: the dv/dt
reactor and the voltage limiting network (Voltage Peak Limiter), which limits voltage peaks
and returns the energy to the DC link.
The dv/dt filter plus VPL is to be used for motors for which the voltage strength of the
insulation system is unknown or insufficient. Standard motors of the 1LA5, 1LA6 and
1LA8 series only require them at supply voltages > 500 V +10%.
The dv/dt filter plus VPL limits the rate of voltage rise to values < 500 V/µs and the typical
voltage peaks at rated line voltages to the values below (with motor cable lengths < 150 m):
< 1000 V at Vline < 575 V.

Components
The Order Nos. of the individual components (dv/dt reactor and voltage limiting network) are
listed in the following table:

Table 5-18 dv/dt filter plus VPL, Order Nos. of the individual components

dv/dt filter plus VPL dv/dt reactor Voltage limiting network


6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6CA0 6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0
6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 6SL3000-2DE35-0CA0 6SL3000-2DE35-0BA0

5.3.1.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 100 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Note
The connecting cables to the Motor Module must be kept as short as possible (max. 5 m).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

Caution
The terminals must be correctly connected:
• dv/dt reactor
– Incoming cable to the Motor Modules 1U1, 1V1, 1W1, and
– outgoing cable to the load 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
• Voltage limiting network (Voltage Peak Limiter - VPL)
– Cable from the DC link to the Motor Module at DCPS, DCNS and
– cable to the dv/dt reactor 1U2, 1V2, 1W2.
If this is not observed, then there is a danger of damage to the dv/dt reactor and the voltage
limiting network.

Caution
When using dv/dt filters that SIEMENS has not approved for SINAMICS, then these dv/dt
filters can be thermally damaged.

Caution
The surface temperature of the dv/dt reactors may exceed 80 °C.

Caution
The maximum permissible output frequency when using dv/dt filters is 150 Hz.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-23
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3.1.3 Interface description

Figure 5-13 Interface overview, voltage limiting network, type 1

Figure 5-14 Interface overview, voltage limiting network, type 2

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3.1.4 Connection of the dv/dt filter

3RZHU0RGXOH
 GYGW5
H DFWRU 0RWRU
'&3 8
 8

'&3 8 8
'&36 9
 9
 9
'&OLQN 9 0
'&1
'&16
:
 :
 : a
'&1 :

3( 3(
3( 3(

'&36 8

9

'&16 :
3(

9ROWDJHOLPLWLQJQHWZRUN

Figure 5-15 Connection of the dv/dt filter

Cable cross-sections

Table 5-19 Cable cross-sections for connected between a dv/dt filter and Power Module

dv/dt filter plus VPL Connection to the DC link Connection between a dv/dt reactor
(DCPS / DCNS) and voltage limiting network
[mm²] (1U2, 1V2, 1W2) [mm²]

6SL3000-2DE32-6AA0 35 10
6SL3000-2DE35-0AA0 70 16

Note
The connections should be kept as short as possible.
The maximum cable length for the specified connections is is 5 m.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-25
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3.1.5 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor

O

O O

D
D D
D

Q

0RXQWLQJKROH
G

Q
KPD[
K
K

Q
D
K

D

Q Q

Q

Figure 5-16 Dimension drawing, dv/dt reactor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-26 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

Table 5-20 Dimensions dv/dt reactor, 3-ph. 380 V – 480 V AC, all data in mm and (inches)

6SL3000- 2DE32-6CA0 2DE35-0CA0


a2 25 (0.98) 30 (1.18)
a3 5 (0.19) 6 (0.23)
a4 14 (0.55) 17 (0.66)
a5 10.5 x 14 (0.41 x 0.55) 14 x 18 (0.55 x 0.70)
a6 7 (0.27) 9 (0.35)
a7 - -
a8 - -
I4 410 (16.14) 460 (18.11)
I5 135 (5.31) 152.5 (6.00)
hmax 370 (14.56) 370 (14.56)
h2 258 (10.15) 240 (9.44)
h3 76 (2.99) 83 (3.26)
n1 1) 141 (5.55) 182 (7.16)
n2 1) 316 (12.44) 356 (14.01)
n3 229 (9.01) 275 (10.82)
n4 72 (2.83) 71 (2.79)
d3 M10 [12 x 18] (0.47 x 0.70) M12 [15 x 22] (0.59 x 0.86)
1) Lengths n1 and n2 correspond to the distance between holes

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-27
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

5.3.1.6 Dimension drawing, limiting network

š

 
 


 
 

š

[





[



  
   

   

Figure 5-17 Dimension drawing, voltage limiting network, type 1


 



 

š
 
 

 
[ 


 
 [
 š


   


   
   

Figure 5-18 Dimension drawing, voltage limiting network, type 2

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-28 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

Table 5-21 Assigning voltage limiting networks to dimension drawings

Voltage limiting network Dimension drawing, type


6SL3000-2DE32-6BA0 Type 1
6SL3000-2DE35-0BA0 Type 2

5.3.1.7 Technical data

Table 5-22 Technical data, dv/dt filter plus VPL, 3-ph. 380 V – 480 V AC, Part 1

Order No. 6SL3000- 2DE32-6AA0 2DE32-6AA0 2DE35-0AA0


Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3310- 1TE32-1AA0 1TE32-6AA0 1TE33-1AA0
Rated power of Motor Module kW 110 132 160
dv/dt reactor
Ithmax A 260 260 490
Power loss, typical kW 0.573 0.573 0.696
Connections
- to the Motor Module M10 M10 M12
- load M10 M10 M12
- PE M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible m 300 (shielded)
cable length between dv/dt 450 (non-shielded)
reactor and motor
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 410 410 460
Height mm 370 370 370
Depth mm 229 229 275
Weight, approx. kg 66 66 122
Voltage limiting network (Voltage Peak Limiter - VPL)
Ithmax A 260 260 490
Power loss, typical kW 0.029 0.029 0.042
Connections
- to the dv/dt reactor M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm²
- DC M8 M8 Terminal 70 mm²
- PE M?? M?? Terminal 35 mm²
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 265 265 400
Height mm 265 265 285
Depth mm 190 190 210
Weight, approx. kg 6 6 16

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 5-29
Motor-side power components
5.3 dv/dt filter

Table 5-23 Technical data, dv/dt filter plus VPL, 3-ph. 380 V – 480 V AC, Part 2

Order No. 6SL3000- 2DE35-0AA0 2DE35-0AA0 2DE35-0AA0


Suitable for Motor Module 6SL3310- 1TE33-8AA0 1TE35-0AA0 1TE35-0AA0
Rated power of Motor Module kW 200 250 250
dv/dt reactor
Ithmax A 490 490 490
Power loss, typical kW 0.696 0.696 0.696
Connections
- to the Motor Module M12 M12 M12
- load M12 M12 M12
- PE M6 M6 M6
Max. permissible m 300 (shielded)
cable length between dv/dt 450 (non-shielded)
reactor and motor
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 460 460 460
Height mm 370 370 370
Depth mm 275 275 275
Weight, approx. kg 122 122 122
Voltage limiting network (Voltage Peak Limiter - VPL)
Ithmax A 490 490 490
Power loss, typical kW 0.042 0.042 0.042
Connections
- to the dv/dt reactor Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- DC Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm² Terminal 70 mm²
- PE Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm² Terminal 35 mm²
Degree of protection IP00 IP00 IP00
Dimensions
Width mm 400 400 400
Height mm 285 285 285
Depth mm 210 210 210
Weight, approx. kg 16 16 16

Equipment Manual AC Drive


5-30 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units 6
6.1 6.1 Introduction

Description
The Control Units of SINAMICS S120 AC Drive are designed for use with Blocksize format
or Chassis format Power Modules.

Advantages
1. The control module CU310 DP provides the external communications interface
PROFIBUS and a TTL/HTL encoder evaluation.
2. The control module CU310 PN has two PROFINET interfaces (ports).
3. Power modules can also be connected to the multi-axis Control Unit using the adapter
module CUA31. The combination of a modular power unit and a Control Unit Adapter 31
(CUA31) is used to extend an existing DC/AC drive line-up with Control Unit by one axis.

Note
The firmware and parameter settings are stored on the CompactFlash card, which is
plugged into the CU310 Control Unit.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-1
Control Units
6.1 Introduction

Control Unit 310 DP Control Unit 310 PN

Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.1 Introduction

5'<
&20
287!9
02'

&RPSDFW)ODVK&DUG

'XPP\SODWH

Figure 6-1 Overview, Control Unit 310 DP (CU310 DP)

Note
The Control Unit and the CompactFlash card must be ordered separately.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-3
Control Units
6.1 Introduction

Figure 6-2 Overview, Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2 6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.1 Description
The Control Unit 310 DP (PROFIBUS) is the component in which the open-loop and closed-
loop control functions of a drive are implemented.
The CU310 DP has the following interfaces (ports):

Table 6-1 Overview of the CU310 interfaces

Type Number
Digital inputs 4
Digital inputs/outputs 4
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 1
PROFIBUS interface 1
Serial interface (RS232) 1
Power Module Interface (PM-IF) 1
Encoder interface (HTL/TTL) 1
EP terminals/ 1
temperature sensor connection
24 V electronics power supply 1
Test sockets 3+1
Interface for BOP 1

Note
For test purposes, the fan also runs in the cold state at regular intervals.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-5
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.2 Safety information

Note
The CompactFlash card may only be inserted and removed from the Control Unit when in
the no-voltage condition.

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed. It is
not permissible that the connecting cables cover the cooling openings.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3 Interface description

6.2.3.1 Overview



3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

;
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
$
;
352),%86
;
6FUHZVKLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ (QFRGHULQWHUIDFH +7/77/ 
0IURP:HLGPíOOHUDQG
;
SURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
01P

;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\
7\SHSODWH
6ORWIRU
770
&RPSDFW)ODVKFDUG
WHVWVRFNHWV

;
/('V
(3WHUPLQDOV

WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUFRQQHFWLRQ
5'<
&20
287!9
; 02'
'LJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWV

6ORWIRU%23 5(6(7EXWWRQ

352),%86
DGGUHVVVZLWFK

Figure 6-3 Description of the CU310 DP interfaces (ports)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-7
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.2 Sample connection


([W 0
9
; 
;    ;
 0 ;
352),%86

5['
7['

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW
0

(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH
; 6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
 9
 9
0 0
0 0

; &8'3
 QF
 QF

0

7HPS 30,)
 7HPS 3RUWV
˽

QF
 (39
 (30

 

;

 ',
 ',
 ',
 ',

0
  
0
 ','2
 ','2

0 287
 ','2
 ','2

0
 

 8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHVIRUIDVWLQSXWV
&RPSDFW)ODVK
 -XPSHURSHQHOHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV ',
 &DQEHLQGLYLGXDOO\SDUDPHWHUL]HGDVLQSXWRXWSXW FDUG
 5HTXLUHGIRUVDIHW\ಮ6DIH7RUTXH2))ಯ
 8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOH
 2QO\DGHYHORSPHQWLQWHUIDFH

Figure 6-4 Connection example CU310 DP

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.3 X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 6-2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Molex, order number: 85999-3255
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 50 m.

6.2.3.4 X120 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection

Table 6-3 Terminal strip X120

Terminal Function Technical specifications


1 Reserved, do not use
2 Reserved, do not use
3 M Ground
4 +Temp KTY or PTC input
5 -Temp Ground for KTY or PTC
6 Reserved, do not use
7 EP +24 V Safe standstill input (+)
8 EP M1 Safe standstill input (-)

Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm2

Notice
The KTY temperature sensor/the PTC must be connected with the correct polarity.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-9
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.5 X121 digital inputs/outputs

Table 6-4 Terminal strip X121

Terminal Designation 1) Technical specifications


1 DI 0 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
2 DI 1 Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
Isolation: The reference potential is terminal M1
3 DI 2
Level (incl. ripple)
4 DI 3 High level: 15 V to 30 V
5 M1 Low level: -3 V to 5 V
Signal propagation times:
6 M
L → H approx. 50 μs
H → L: approx. 100 μs
7 DI/DO 8 As input:
8 DI/DO 9 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
9 M
Level (incl. ripple)
10 DI/DO 10 High level: 15 V to 30 V
11 DI/DO 11 Low level: -3 V to 5 V
12 M Terminal numbers 8, 10, and 11 are "fast inputs"
Signal propagation times for inputs/”fast inputs”:
L → H: approx. 50 μs/5 μs
H → L: approx. 100 μs/50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continued-short-circuit-proof
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm 2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output; M: Electronic ground M1: Ground reference

Notice
An open input is interpreted as "low".
The "fast inputs" can be used in conjunction with a measuring system for position sensing.
To enable digital inputs (DI) 0 to 3 to function, terminal M1 must be connected. This can be
done as follows:
Connect the digital inputs' ground reference, or a jumper to terminal M. This removes the
electrical isolation for these digital inputs.

Note
An external 24 V power supply is required.
If a the 24 V power supply voltage is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are de-
activated during this time.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.6 Electronics power supply X124

Table 6-5 Terminal block X124

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.8 A
(without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital outputs)
M Electronic ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronic ground 20 A at 55 °C

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix A)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

6.2.3.7 X21 PROFIBUS

Table 6-6 PROFIBUS interface X21

Pin Signal name Meaning Range


1 - Do not use
2 M24_SERV Power supply for teleservice, ground 0V
3 RxD/TxD–P Receive/transmit data P (B) RS485
4 CNTR–P Control signal TTL
5 DGND PROFIBUS data reference potential
6 VP Supply voltage plus 5 V + -10 %
7 P24_SERV Power supply for teleservice, + (24 V) 24 V (20.4 V -
28.8 V)
8 RxD/TxD–N Receive/transmit data N (A) RS485
9 - Do not use

Type: 9-pin SUB-D female

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-11
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

Note
A teleservice adapter can be connected to the PROFIBUS interface (X21) for remote
diagnosis purposes.
The power supply for the teleservice terminals 2 and 7 withstands a max. load and continued
short-circuit current of 150 mA.

PROFIBUS connector
At the first and last node (device) in a line, the terminating resistors must be switched-in in
order to ensure disturbance/noise-free communications.
The terminating resistors are activated in the connector.
The cable shield must be connected at both ends over large-surface area contacts.

6.2.3.8 X23 HTL/ TTL encoder interface

Table 6-7 Encoder connection X23

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 Reserved, do not use
2 SSI_CLK SSI clock, positive
3 SSI_XCLK SSI clock, negative
4 PENC Encoder power supply
5 PENC Encoder power supply
6 PSENSE Remote sense encoder power supply (P)
7 M Electronic ground
8 Reserved, do not use
9 MSENSE Remote sense encoder power supply (N)
10 RP R track positive
11 RN R track negative
12 BN B track negative
13 BP B track positive
14 AN_SSI_XDAT A track negative / SSI data negative
15 AP_SSI_DAT A track positive / SSI data positive
Type: 15-pin SUB D connector

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.9 PROFIBUS address switches

Table 6-8 PROFIBUS address switches

Technical specifications Switch Significance


S1 20 = 1
0 21 2 3 4 5 6
2 2 2 2 2 2 S2 21 = 2
Significance:
1 2 4 8 16 32 64
ON S3 22 = 4
OFF S4 23 = 8
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S5 24 = 16
1 + 4 + 32 = 37
Example: S6 25 = 32
PROFIBUS address = 37
S7 26 = 64

Note
The PROFIBUS address switches are defaulted to 0 or 127. In these two settings,
addresses are assigned via parameters.
The address switch is behind the blanking plate. The blanking plate is part of the scope of
supply.

Setting the PROFIBUS address


The following reference contains further information about setting the PROFIBUS address:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-13
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.10 X22 serial interface (RS232)

Table 6-9 Serial interface (RS-232-C) X140

Pin Designation Technical data


2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
5 Ground Ground reference

Type: 9-pin SUB D connector

6.2.3.11 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2

Table 6-10 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2

Socket Function Technical specifications


T0 Measurement socket 0 Voltage: 0 V to 5 V
T1 Measurement socket 1 Resolution: 8 bits
Load current: max. 3 mA
T2 Measurement socket 2 Continued-short-circuit-proof
M Ground The reference potential is terminal M
The measurement sockets are only suitable for bunch pin plugs with a diameter of 2 mm.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.12 Slot for the CompactFlash card

Figure 6-5 Slot for CompactFlash card

Caution
The CompactFlash card may only be inserted as shown in the figure (arrow top right).
The CompactFlash card may only be inserted or removed when the Control Unit is in a
no-voltage condition.
When returning a defective Control Unit, remove the CompactFlash card and keep it for
insertion in the replacement unit.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-15
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.3.13 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit 310 DP

Table 6-11 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit

LED Color State Description


- Off Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance range
Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
Green communication is taking place.
Flashing light Writing to CompactFlash card
2 Hz
Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
RDY Red Flashing light CompactFlash card has not been inserted.
(READY) 0.5 Hz Boot error (e.g. firmware cannot be loaded to the RAM).
Green Flashing light Control Unit 310 DP is ready for operation.
Red 0.5 Hz No software licenses for device.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Flashing light Unable to load firmware to RAM
0.5 Hz
Flashing light Firmware CRC error
2 Hz
- Off Cyclic communication is not (yet) running.
Note:
The PROFIBUS is ready for communication when the Control Unit is
COM
ready for operation (see RDY LED).
(PROFIBUS
cyclic operation) Green Steady light Cyclic communication is running.
Flashing light Cyclic communication is not yet running fully.
0.5 Hz Possible reasons:
• The master is not transmitting setpoints.
• No global control (GC) or master sign-of-life is transmitted during
isochronous operation.
Red Steady light Cyclic communication has been interrupted.
- Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance
range.
Power supply ≤5 V.
Electronics power supply for measuring system available.
Power supply >5 V.
OUT > 5V
Orange Steady light Notice
You must ensure that the connected encoder can be operated with a
24 V supply.
If an encoder that is designed for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V
supply, this can destroy the encoder electronics.
MOD -- Off Reserved

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

RESET button
The RESET button is located behind the blanking plate.

6.2.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-6 Dimension drawing CU310 DP

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-17
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.5 Mounting the CU310 on the Power Module Blocksize


As soon as the Power Module has been been correctly installed, the Control Unit can be
attached to the Power Module.

Snap the CU310 onto the Power Module 340 Power Module 340 (frame size D) with CU310
(frame size D)
The procedure when mounting the Control Unit on the Power Module is independent of the
frame size of the Power Modules.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

Removing the Control Unit

Removing the CU310 from the Power Module 340 (frame size D)
In order to remove the Control Unit from the Power Module, the blue release lever, as shown
in the diagram, must be pressed downwards and the Control Unit swung-out to the front.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-19
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.6 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis

Figure 6-7 Mounting the CU310 in the Power Module Chassis, frame size FX

The DRIVE-CLiQ cable and the cable for the 24 V power supply must be correctly routed so
that the front flap can close.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.2 Control Unit CU310 DP (PROFIBUS)

6.2.7 Technical data

Table 6-12 Technical data CU310 DP

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC DC 24 (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and digital outputs) ADC 0.8
Power loss W <20
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/3 Nm screw
Response time The response time of digital inputs/outputs depends on the
evaluation (refer to the function diagram).
Reference: /LH1/ SINAMICS S List Manual, Chapter "Function
diagrams".
Weight kg 0.95

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-21
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3 6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.1 Description
The Control Unit 310 PN (PROFINET) is the control module in which the open-loop and
closed-loop control functions of a drive are implemented.
The CU310 PN has the following interfaces (ports):

Table 6-13 Overview of the CU310 PN interfaces (ports)

Type Number
Digital inputs 4
Digital inputs/outputs 4
DRIVE-CLiQ interface 1
PROFINET interfaces 2
Serial interface (RS232) 1
Power Module Interface (PM-IF) 1
Encoder interface (HTL/TTL) 1
EP terminals/ 1
temperature sensor connection
24 V electronics power supply 1
Test sockets 3+1
Interface for BOP 1
Available from approx. 07/2006.

6.3.2 Safety information

Note
The CompactFlash card may only be inserted and removed from the Control Unit when in
the no-voltage condition.

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed. It is
not permissible that the connecting cables cover the cooling openings.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3 Interface description

6.3.3.1 Overview

3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH 30,)

;
6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
$
;;
352),1(7VRFNHWV ;
(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH +7/77/ 
6FUHZVKLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
0IURP:HLGPíOOHUDQG ;
SURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU '5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH
FRQQHFWLRQ01P

;
HOHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\ 7\SHSODWH

770
&RPSDFW)ODVK
7HVWVRFNHWV
FDUG
; /('V
(3WHUPLQDOV 5'<
WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUFRQQHFWLRQ &20
287!9
02'

;
GLJLWDOLQSXWVRXWSXWVG

6ORWIRU%23 5(6(7EXWWRQ

Figure 6-8 Description of the CU310 PN interfaces

Note
The PROFIBUS address switch is present for the CU310 PN, however it has not function.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-23
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.2 Sample connection


([W 0
9 ; 
; ;    ; ;
 0

5['
7['

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW
352),1(7

0

(QFRGHULQWHUIDFH
; 6HULDOLQWHUIDFH
 9
 9
0 0
0 0

; &831
 QF
 QF

0

7HPS 30,)

˽
7HPS 3RUWV

QF
 (39
 (30

 

;

 ',
 ',
 ',
 ',

0
  
0
 ','2
 ','2

0 287
 ','2
 ','2

0
 

 8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOHVIRUIDVWLQSXWV &RPSDFW)ODVK
 -XPSHURSHQHOHFWULFDOLVRODWLRQIRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV ',
 &DQEHLQGLYLGXDOO\SDUDPHWHUL]HGDVLQSXWRXWSXW FDUG
 5HTXLUHGIRUVDIHW\ಮ6DIH7RUTXH2))ಯ
 8VHVKLHOGHGFDEOH
 2QO\DGHYHORSPHQWLQWHUIDFH

Figure 6-9 Connection example CU310 PN

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.3 X100 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 6-14 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Molex, order number: 85999-3255
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 100 m.

6.3.3.4 X120 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection

Table 6-15 Terminal strip X120

Terminal Function Technical specifications


1 Reserved, do not use
2 Reserved, do not use
3 M Ground
4 +Temp KTY or PTC input
5 -Temp Ground for KTY or PTC
6 Reserved, do not use
7 EP +24 V Safe standstill input (+)
8 EP M1 Safe standstill input (-)

Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm2

Notice
The KTY temperature sensor/the PTC must be connected with the correct polarity.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-25
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.5 X121 digital inputs/outputs

Table 6-16 Terminal strip X121

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 DI 0 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
2 DI 1 Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
Isolation: The reference potential is terminal M1
3 DI 2
Level (incl. ripple)
4 DI 3 High level: 15 V to 30 V
5 M1 Low level: -3 V to 5 V
Signal propagation times:
6 M
L → H approx. 50 μs
H → L: approx. 100 μs
7 DI/DO 8 As input:
8 DI/DO 9 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
9 M
Level (incl. ripple)
10 DI/DO 10 High level: 15 V to 30 V
11 DI/DO 11 Low level: -3 V to 5 V
12 M Terminal numbers 8, 10, and 11 are "fast inputs"
Signal propagation times for inputs/”fast inputs”:
L → H: approx. 50 μs/5 μs
H → L: approx. 100 μs/50 μs
As output:
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 500 mA
Continued-short-circuit-proof
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm2
Type: Spring-loaded terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: digital input; DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output; M: Electronic ground M1: Ground reference

Notice
An open input is interpreted as "low".
The "fast inputs" can be used in conjunction with a measuring system for position sensing.
To enable digital inputs (DI) 0 to 3 to function, terminal M1 must be connected. This can be
done as follows:
Connect the digital inputs' ground reference, or a jumper to terminal M. This removes the
electrical isolation for these digital inputs.

Note
An external 24 V power supply is required.
If a the 24 V power supply voltage is briefly interrupted, then the digital outputs are de-
activated during this time.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-26 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.6 Electronics power supply X124

Table 6-17 Terminal block X124

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.8 A (without DRIVE-CLiQ
or digital outputs)
M Electronic ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronic ground 20 A at 55 °C

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix A)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

6.3.3.7 X200 - X201 PROFINET

Table 6-18 PROFINET interfaces X200 - X201

Pin Signal name Meaning


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
Connector type: RJ45plus socket
Cable type: PROFINET

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-27
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.8 X23 HTL/ TTL encoder interface

Table 6-19 Encoder connection X23

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 Reserved, do not use
2 SSI_CLK SSI clock, positive
3 SSI_XCLK SSI clock, negative
4 PENC Encoder power supply
5 PENC Encoder power supply
6 PSENSE Remote sense encoder power supply (P)
7 M Electronic ground
8 Reserved, do not use
9 MSENSE Remote sense encoder power supply (N)
10 RP R track positive
11 RN R track negative
12 BN B track negative
13 BP B track positive
14 AN_SSI_XDAT A track negative / SSI data negative
15 AP_SSI_DAT A track positive / SSI data positive
Type: 15-pin SUB D connector

6.3.3.9 X22 serial interface (RS232)

Table 6-20 Serial interface (RS-232-C) X140

Pin Designation Technical data


2 RxD Receive data
3 TxD Transmit data
5 Ground Ground reference

Type: 9-pin SUB D connector

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-28 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.10 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2

Table 6-21 Measurement sockets T0, T1, and T2

Socket Function Technical specifications


T0 Measurement socket 0 Voltage: 0 V to 5 V
T1 Measurement socket 1 Resolution: 8 bits
Load current: max. 3 mA
T2 Measurement socket 2 Continued-short-circuit-proof
M Ground The reference potential is terminal M
The measurement sockets are only suitable for bunch pin plugs with a diameter of 2 mm.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-29
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.3.11 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit 310 PN

Table 6-22 Description of the LEDs on the Control Unit

LED Color State Description


- Off Electronics power supply outside permissible tolerance range
Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
Green communication is taking place.
Flashing light Writing to CompactFlash card.
2 Hz
Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
RDY Red Flashing light CompactFlash card has not been inserted.
(READY) 0.5 Hz Boot error (e.g. firmware cannot be loaded to the RAM).
Green Flashing light Control Unit 310 PN is ready for operation.
Red 0.5 Hz No software licenses for device.
Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
Orange Flashing light Unable to load firmware to RAM
0.5 Hz
Flashing light Firmware CRC error
2 Hz
Cyclic communication is not (yet) running.
- Off Note:
The PROFINET is ready for communication when the Control Unit is
ready for operation (see RDY LED).
COM
Steady light Cyclic communication is running.
(PROFIBUS
cyclic operation) Cyclic communication is not yet running fully.
Green Flashing light Possible reasons:
0.5 Hz • The master is not transmitting setpoints.
• No global control (GC) or master sign-of-life is transmitted during
isochronous operation.
Red Steady light Cyclic communication has been interrupted.
- Off Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance
range.
Power supply ≤5 V.
Electronics power supply for measuring system available.
OUT>5V
Power supply >5 V.
Orange Steady light Notice
You must ensure that the connected encoder can be operated with a
24 V supply.
If an encoder that is designed for a 5 V supply is operated with a 24 V
supply, this can destroy the encoder electronics.
MOD -- Off Reserved

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-30 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

RESET button
The RESET button is located behind the blanking plate.

6.3.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-10 Dimension drawing, CU310 PN

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-31
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

6.3.5 Mounting the CU310 on the Power Module Blocksize


As soon as the Power Module has been been correctly installed, the Control Unit can be
attached to the Power Module.

Snap the CU310 onto the Power Module 340 Power Module 340 (frame size D) with CU310
(frame size D)
The procedure when mounting the Control Unit on the Power Module is independent of the
frame size of the Power Modules.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-32 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.3 Control Unit CU310 PN (PROFINET)

Removing the Control Unit

Removing the CU310 from the Power Module 340 (frame size D)
In order to remove the Control Unit from the Power Module, the blue release lever, as shown
in the diagram, must be pressed downwards and the Control Unit swung-out to the front.

6.3.6 Technical data

Table 6-23 Technical data CU310 PN

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC DC 24 (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and digital outputs) ADC 0.8
Power loss W 20
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/3 Nm screw
Response time The response time of digital inputs/outputs depends on the
evaluation (refer to the function diagram).
Reference: /LH1/ SINAMICS S List Manual, Chapter "Function
diagrams".
Weight kg 0.99

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-33
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4 6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4.1 Description
The Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), combined with a modular power unit is used to extend
an existing DC/AC drive line-up e.g. with CU320 by one drive.
The closed-loop control is externally implemented. This is the reason that a SINAMICS,
SIMOTION or SINUMERIK closed-loop control is always required for operation.
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 50 m.
The Control Unit Adapter 31 has the following interfaces (ports):

Table 6-24 Interface overview of the CUA31

Type Number
DRIVE-CLiQ interfaces 3
EP terminal / 1
temperature sensor connection
Power Module Interface (PM-IF) 1
24 V electronics power supply 1

6.4.2 Safety Information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed. It is
not permissible that the connecting cables cover the cooling openings.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-34 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4.3 Interface description

6.4.3.1 Overview

;;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFHV

$

3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH 30,) 

6FUHZVKLHOGFRQQHFWLRQ
0IURP:HLGPíOOHU
01P /('

5'<

;
(3WHUPLQDO
WHPSHUDWXUHVHQVRUFRQQHFWLRQ

;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\

7\SHSODWH

Figure 6-11 Interface description CUA31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-35
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)


([W 0
9
 *1' ; ; ;

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW
;
 9
 9
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'

;


˽
7HPS &8$

7HPS

(39

(30


 

5HTXLUHGIRU6DIHW\

6KLHOGLQJUHTXLUHG

Figure 6-12 Connection example, CUA31

6.4.3.2 X200 - X202 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 6-25 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Molex, order number: 85999-3255
The maximum DRIVE-CLiQ cable length is 50 m.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-36 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4.3.3 X224 electronics power supply

Table 6-26 Terminal strip X224

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.8 A (without DRIVE-CLiQ
or digital outputs)
M Electronic ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronic ground 20 A at 55 °C
Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm2
Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix A)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node.

6.4.3.4 X210 EP terminals / temperature sensor connection

Table 6-27 Terminal strip X210

Terminal Function Technical specifications


1 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84–1C130/PTC
2 -Temp
3 EP +24 V (Enable Pulses) Supply voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V - 28.8 V)
Current consumption: 10 mA
4 EP M1 (Enable Pulses)
Isolated input
Signal propagation times:
L → H 100 μs
H → L: 1000 μs
Max. cross-section that can be connected 1.5 mm2
Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Connection Methods)

Notice
The KTY temperature sensor/the PTC must be connected with the correct polarity.

Note
The temperature sensor connection is required for motors whose temperature value is not
transmitted by DRIVE-CLiQ.
If the "safe standstill" function is selected, 24 V DC must be applied to terminal 3 and M must
be applied to terminal 4. Upon removal, pulse inhibit is activated.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-37
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4.3.5 Description of the LEDs at the Control Unit Adapter 31

Table 6-28 Description of the LEDs at the Control Unit Adapter 31

LED Color State Description


RDY Red Steady light At least one fault is present in this component.
(READY) Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains information about the cause and rectification of faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

6.4.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 6-13 Dimension drawing, Control Unit Adapter 31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-38 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

6.4.5 Mounting

Snapping the CUA31 onto the Power Module 340 Power Module 340 (frame size D) and CUA31
(frame size D)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 6-39
Control Units
6.4 Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31)

Removing the Control Unit Adapters 31

Removing the CUA31 from the Power Module 340 (frame size D)
In order to remove the Control Unit Adapter 31 from the Power Module, the blue release
lever, as shown in the diagram, must be pressed downwards and the Control Unit
Adapter 31 is swung-out to the front.

6.4.6 Technical data

Table 6-29 Technical data CUA31

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC DC 24 (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ and digital outputs) ADC 0.8
Power loss W 7.2
Weight kg 0.31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


6-40 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
7
Supplementary system components and
encoder system integration

7.1 7.1 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)

7.1.1 Description
The Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) is a basic operator panel with six keys and a display
unit with background lighting. The BOP20 can be inserted on the SINAMICS Control Unit
CU310 DP / PN and operated.

The following functions are possible with the BOP:


• Input of parameters and activation of functions
• Display of operating modes, parameters, alarms and faults

7.1.2 Interface description

Figure 7-1 Basic Operator Panel (BOP20)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-1
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)

Overview of displays and keys

Figure 7-2 Overview of displays and keys

Table 7-1 Displays

Display Meaning
top left The active drive object of the BOP is displayed here.
2 positions The displays and key operations always refer to this drive object.
RUN Is lit (bright) if the displayed drive is in the RUN state (in operation).
top right The following is displayed in this field:
2 positions • More than 6 digits: Characters that are present but cannot be seen (e.g. “r2” ––> 2 characters
to the right are invisible, “L1” ––> 1 character to the left is invisible)
• Faults: Selects/displays other drives with faults
• Designation of BICO inputs (bi, ci)
• Designation of BICO outputs (bo, co)
Source object of a BICO interconnection to a drive object different than the active one.
S Is (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the value was not transferred into the non-
volatile memory.
P Is lit (bright) if, for a parameter, the value only becomes effective after pressing the P key.
C Is light (bright) if at least one parameter was changed and the calculation for consistent data
management has still not been initiated.
Below, 6 position Displays, e.g. parameters, indices, faults and alarms.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)

BOP20 keyboard

Table 7-2 Assignment of the BOP20 keyboard

Key Name Meaning


ON Powers-up the drive - the "ON/OFF1", "OFF2" or "OFF3"
commands for this purpose should come from the BOP.
OFF Powers-down the drive - the "ON/OFF1", "OFF2" or "OFF3"
commands for this purpose should come from the BOP.
Note:
The effectiveness of these keys can be defined using the
appropriate BICO parameterization (e.g. using these keys, it is
possible to simultaneously control all of the axes that have been
configured).
The structure of the BOP control word corresponds to the structure
of the PROFIBUS control word.
Functions The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
Note:
The effectiveness of this key to acknowledge faults can be defined
using the appropriate BiCo parameterization.
Parameter The significance of these keys depends on the actual display.
Raise The keys are dependent on the actual display and are used to
raise or lower values.
Lower

Displays and operating the BOP20


Information about the displays and using the BOP20 is provided in the following reference:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-3
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.1 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)

7.1.3 Mounting

Table 7-3 Mounting

1. CU310 and BOP20 2. Press the bars of the dummy cover together

3. Remove the dummy cover 4. Locate the BOP20

Note
The Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) may be inserted and withdrawn while the Control Unit
is operational.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.1.4 Technical data

Table 7-4 Technical data

Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)


Weight, approx. kg 0.02

7.2 7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.1 Description
The Terminal Module 31 (TM31) is a terminal expansion module for snapping on to a
DIN 50022 mounting rail. Terminal Module TM31 can be used to increase the number of
available digital inputs/digital outputs and also the number of analog inputs/analog outputs
within a drive system.
The TM31 contains the following terminals:

Table 7-5 Interface overview of the TM31

Type Number
Digital inputs 8
Digital inputs/outputs 4
Analog inputs 2
Analog outputs 2
Relay outputs 2
Temperature sensor input 1

7.2.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Caution
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the chassis potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-5
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3 Interface description

7.2.3.1 Overview

DRIVE-CliQ X500
interfaces X501

X524
Electronics power
supply

LED 1 X540
Auxiliary voltage for
X520 1 digital inputs
Digital 1

inputs X530

S5
Voltage/current X541
1
measurement
1 Digital
inputs/outputs
X521
Analog inputs

1
1
X522
Analog outputs X542
Relay outputs

Shield connection
PE conductor connection
M4 / 1.8 Nm

Figure 7-3 Interface description TM31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.2 Sample connection

 
([W
9 0 0

; ;
;

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW 

'5,9(&/L4VRFNHW 
  ;
 
9 $,
 
9 $,
0 
0 $,
0 
0 $,

3 


0
 
1
7HUPLQDO0RGXOH
0 

;
 ', ;
 ', 0 
$29 9
 ', 
0 $2
 ', 
$2& $
0  
 
$29 9
0
   0 
0 $2

$2& $

  7HPS
;

   7HPS
9

9
 ;
9 

  
9 
  ','2

9 
  ','2
 9 
  ','2

9 
  ','2

9 
0

; ;
 ', 

 ', 0 
'2
 ', 0 

 ', 
0
 
0 '2
  0
 
0

 )RUWKLVFLUFXLWH[DPSOHWKHMXPSHUV
PXVWEHLQVHUWHG   6KLHOGLQJUHTXLUHG

 
&DQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\DVFXUUHQWVRXUFH
 &DQEHSDUDPHWHUL]HGLQGLYLGXDOO\DVRXWSXW

Figure 7-4 Example connection of TM31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-7
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.3 X500 and X501 DRIVE-CLiQ interface

Table 7-6 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A + (24 V) Power supply
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground
Blanking plate for DRIVE-CLiQ interface: Molex, order number: 85999-3255

7.2.3.4 Electronics power supply X524

Table 7-7 Terminals for the electronics power supply

Terminal Designation Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V DC (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
Current consumption: max. 0.5 A
+ Electronics power supply
M Electronic ground
Max. current via jumper in connector:
M Electronic ground 20 A at 55 °C

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix A)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.
The current consumption increases by the value for the DRIVE-CLiQ node and digital
outputs.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.5 Digital inputs X520

Table 7-8 Screw terminal X520

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 DI 0 Voltage: - 3 V to +30 V
2 DI 1 Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
Isolation: The reference potential
3 DI 2 is terminal M1
4 DI 3 Signal propagation times:
5 M1 L → H approx. 50 μs
H → L: approx. 100 µs
6 M
Level (incl. ripple)
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to 5 V

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: digital input; M: electronic ground M1: Ground reference

Note
To enable the digital inputs to function, terminal M1 must be connected. This can be done as
follows:
1) Connect the reference ground of the digital inputs, or
2) a jumper to terminal M
(Notice: this removes isolation for these digital inputs).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-9
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.6 Digital inputs X530

Table 7-9 Screw terminal X530

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 DI 4 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
2 DI 5 Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
Isolation: The reference potential is terminal M2
3 DI 6
Signal propagation times:
4 DI 7 L → H approx. 50 μs
5 M2 H → L: approx. 100 µs
Level (incl. ripple)
6 M
High level: 15 V to 30 V
Low level: -3 V to 5 V

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI: digital input; M: electronic ground; M2: Ground reference

Notice
An open input is interpreted as "low".
To enable the digital inputs to work, terminal M2 must be connected. This can be done as
follows:
1) Route the reference ground of the digital inputs (with the other cable) and connect it to
M2.
2) Jumper terminal M and M2 directly
(the electrical isolation for these digital inputs is therefore removed).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.7 Auxiliary voltage for the digital inputs X540

Table 7-10 Screw terminal X540

Terminal Designation Technical specifications


1 +24 V Voltage: +24 V DC
2 +24 V Max. total load current: 150 mA
3 +24 V
4 +24 V
5 +24 V
6 +24 V
7 +24 V
8 +24 V

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Appendix A)

Note
This voltage supply is only for powering the digital inputs.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-11
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.8 Analog inputs X521

Table 7-11 Terminal block X521

Terminal Name1) Technical specifications


1 AI 0+ You can set the following input signals using the
2 AI 0- appropriate parameters:
Voltage: -10 V to 10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ
3 AI 1+ Current 1: 4 mA to 20 mA; Ri = 250 Ω
4 AI 1- Current 2: -20 mA to 20 mA; Ri = 250 Ω
Current 3: 0 mA to 20 mA; Ri = 250 Ω
Resolution: 12 bits
5 P10 Auxiliary voltage:
P10 = 10 V
6 M
N10 = -10 V
7 N10
Continued-short-circuit-proof
8 M

Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (refer to Appendix A)
1) AI: analog inputs; P10/N10: auxiliary voltage; M or GND: ground reference

Caution
If more than 40 mA flows through the analog current input, then the component could be
destroyed.
The common mode range may not be violated. This means that the analog differential
voltage signals can have a maximum offset voltage of +/-30 V DC with respect to the ground
potential. If the range is infringed, incorrect results may occur during analog/digital
conversion.

7.2.3.9 S5 current/voltage changeover switch for analog inputs

Table 7-12 Current/voltage selector S5

Switch Function
S5.0 Selector voltage (V)/current (I) Al0
S5.1 Selector voltage (V)/current (I) Al1

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.10 Analog outputs/temperature sensor connection X522

Table 7-13 Terminal block X522

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 AO 0V+ You can set the following output signals using parameters:
2 AO 0- Voltage: -10 V to 10 V (max. 3 mA)

3 AO 0C+ Current 1: 4 mA to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)


4 AO 1V+ Current 2: -20 mA to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
5 AO 1- Current 3: 0 mA to 20 mA (max. load resistance ≤ 500 Ω)
6 AO 1C+ Resolution: 11 bits + sign
Continued-short-circuit-proof
7 +Temp Temperature sensor connection KTY84-1C130/PTC
8 -Temp

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) AO xV: analog output voltage; AO xC: Analog output current

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-13
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.11 X541 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Table 7-14 Terminals for bidirectional digital inputs/outputs

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 + As input:
2 DI/DO 8 Voltage: -3 V to 30 V
Typical current consumption: 10 mA at 24 V DC
3 DI/DO 9
Signal propagation times:
4 DI/DO 10 L → H approx. 50 μs
5 DI/DO 11 H → L: approx. 100 µs
As output:
6 M
Voltage: 24 V DC
Max. load current per output: 100 mA
Max. total current of outputs: 400 mA
Continued-short-circuit-proof

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 1.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 1 (see Appendix A)
1) DI/DO: bidirectional digital input/output; M or GND: Electronic ground

Note
An open input is interpreted as "low".

Note
If a momentary interruption in the voltage occurs in the 24 V supply, the digital outputs will
be deactivated until the interruption has been rectified.

Notice
The digital outputs are only functional if terminals 1 and 6 are supplied with 24 V.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.3.12 Relay outputs X542

Table 7-15 Terminal block X542

Terminal Designation1) Technical specifications


1 DO 0.NC Contact type: Two-way contact max. load current: 8 A
2 DO 0.COM Max. switching voltage: 250 VAC, 30 VDC
3 DO 0.NO Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 2000 VA (cosϕ = 1)
Max. switching power at 250 VAC: 750 VA (cosϕ = 0.4)
4 DO 1.NC
Max. switching power at 30 VDC: 240 W (ohmic load)
5 DO 1.COM
Required minimum current: 100 mA
6 DO 1.NO
Overvoltage category: Class III to EN 60 664-1

Max. cross-section that can be connected 2.5 mm2


Type: Screw terminal 3 (see Appendix A)
1) DO: digital output, NO: normally-open contact, NC: normally-closed contact, COM: Mid-position contact

7.2.3.13 Description of the LEDs on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Table 7-16 Description of the LEDs on the TM31

LED Color State Description


- OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance
range.
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
RDY At least one fault is present in this component. Note:
Red Steady light LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being
reconfigured.
Green/ Flashing light Firmware is being downloaded.
Red 2 Hz
Green/ Detection of the components via LED is activated (p0154).
Orange Flashing light Note:
or 2 Hz Both options depend on the LED status when module recognition is
activated via p0154 = 1.
Red/Orange

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-15
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.4 Dimension drawing

 

 

 
 



 
 

Figure 7-5 Dimension drawing of the TM31

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.5 Mounting

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component on to the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right to its final
position.

Removal

3XVKWKHPRGXOH
IRUZDUG

0RXQWLQJVOLGH

3XVKOXJGRZQ

Figure 7-6 Releasing the component from a DIN rail

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-17
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.6 Electrical Connection


It is always advisable to shield the digital I/O wiring.
The following pictures show two typical shield contacts from Weidmüller.

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ :HLGPíOOHU
01P 2UGHU1R./%Í&2

Figure 7-7 Shield contacts

Internet address of the company:


Weidmüller: www.weidmueller.com

Danger
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

Connector codes
To ensure that identical connectors are assigned correctly on the TM31, the connecters are
encoded as shown in the following diagram.

&RGLQJRISOXJ

Figure 7-8 Connector codes of the TM31

The bending radii of the cables must be taken into account (see description of MOTION-
CONNECT).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-19
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.2 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)

7.2.7 Technical data

Table 7-17 Technical data

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current (without DRIVE-CLiQ or digital ADC 0.5
outputs)
Power loss W <10
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Response time The response time for the digital inputs/outputs and the analog inputs/outputs
consists of the following elements:
• Response time on the component itself (approx. 1/2 DRIVE-CLiQ cycle).
• Response transmit time via the DRIVE-CLiQ connection (approx. 1 DRIVE-
CLiQ cycle).
• Evaluation on the control unit (see function diagram).
Reference:SINAMICS S List Manual – "Function diagrams" chapter
Weight kg 1

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3 7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 10 (SMC10) evaluates encoder signals and transmits
the speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature via
DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
The SMC10 can be operated from firmware 2.2 and higher
The SMC10 is used to evaluate sensor signals from resolvers.

Table 7-18 Specification

Value
Transmission ratio of the resolver ü = 0.5
Exciting voltage on the SMC10 when ü=0.5 4.1 Vrms
Amplitude monitoring threshold (secondary 1 Vrms
tracks) of the SMC10
The excitation voltage is 4.1 V and cannot be parameterized.
The excitation frequency is synchronized to the current controller clock cycle and lies in the
range between 5 kHz and 10 kHz.
The ratio between ohmic resistance R and inductance L determines whether the resolver
can be evaluated with the SMC10. See the following diagram:

0LQLPXPLPSHGDQFHV





,QGXFWDQFH/>P+@





5DQJHWKDWLVQRWSHUPLVVLEOH






        
2KPLFUHVLVWDQFH5>2KP@

Figure 7-9 Connectable impedances with an exciting frequency f = 5000 Hz

The maximum sensor cable length is 130 m.


The component is snapped on to a mounting rail according to DIN 50022.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-21
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.2 Safety information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Notice
Only one measuring system can be connected to each Sensor Module.

Note
There may be no electrical connection between the measuring system housing and the
measuring system electronics (this requirement is fulfilled for most encoder systems). If this
is not carefully observed, then under certain circumstances the system will not be able to
reach the required noise immunity (there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing
through the electronics ground).

Caution
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the chassis potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.3 Interface description

7.3.3.1 Overview

X500
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
X524
Electronics power
supply

LED

X520
Encoder system connector

Protective conductor
connection
M4 / 1.8 Nm

Figure 7-10 Interface description of the SMC10

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-23
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.3.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Table 7-19 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-24 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.3.3 X520 sensor system

Table 7-20 Sensor interface X520

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 Reserved, do not use
2 Reserved, do not use
3 A (sin+) Resolver signal A
4 A* (sin-) Inverted resolver signal A
5 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
6 B (cos+) Resolver signal B
7 B* (cos-) Inverted resolver signal B
8 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
9 RESP Resolver excitation positive
10 Reserved, do not use
11 RESN Resolver excitation negative
12 Reserved, do not use
13 +Temp Motor temperature measurement KTY+
14 Reserved, do not use
15 Reserved, do not use
16 Reserved, do not use
17 Reserved, do not use
18 Reserved, do not use
19 Reserved, do not use
20 Reserved, do not use
21 Reserved, do not use
22 Reserved, do not use
23 Reserved, do not use
24 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
25 -Temp Motor temperature measurement KTY-

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-25
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.3.4 Electronics power supply X524

Table 7-21 Terminal block X524

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.35 A
M Electronic ground Maximum current via jumper in connector: 20 A at 55°C

M Electronic ground

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.

7.3.3.5 Description of the LEDs on the SMC10

Table 7-22 Description of the LEDs on the SMC10

LED Color State Technical specifications


- OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible
tolerance range.
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
RDY At least one fault is present in this component. Note:
Red Steady light LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being
reconfigured.
Green/ Flashing light Firmware is being downloaded.
Red 2 Hz
Green/Orange Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144)
or Flashing light Note:
Red/Orange 2 Hz Both options depend on the LED status when component
recognition is activated via p0144 = 1.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-26 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains further information about the cause and rectification of
faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS Commissioning Manual.

7.3.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-11 Dimension drawing of the SMC10

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-27
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.5 Mounting

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component on to the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right to its final
position.

Removal

3XVKWKHPRGXOH
IRUZDUG

0RXQWLQJVOLGH

3XVKOXJGRZQ

Figure 7-12 Releasing the component from a DIN rail

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-28 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.3 Sensor Module Cabinet 10 (SMC10)

7.3.6 Technical data

Table 7-23 Technical data

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current ADC max. 0.3
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0.8
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-29
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4 7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.1 Description
The Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 20 (SMC20) evaluates encoder signals and transmits
the speed, actual position value, rotor position and, if necessary, the motor temperature and
reference point via DRIVE-CLiQ to the Control Unit.
Encoders that can be connected are incremental SIN/COS (1 Vpp) and absolute encoders
with EnDat and SSI (with 5 V operating voltage).
The maximum sensor cable length is 100 m.
The component is snapped on to a mounting rail according to DIN 50022.
The SMC20 can be operated from Firmware 2.2 onwards

7.4.2 Safety Information

Caution
The cooling clearances of 50 mm above and below the components must be observed.

Notice
Only one measuring system can be connected to each Sensor Module.

Note
There may be no electrical connection between the measuring system housing and the
measuring system electronics (this requirement is fulfilled for most encoder systems). If this
is not carefully observed, then under certain circumstances the system will not be able to
reach the required noise immunity (there is then a danger of equalization currents flowing
through the electronics ground).

Caution
Connecting cables to temperature sensors must always be installed with shielding. The
cable shield must be connected to the chassis potential at both ends over a large surface
area. Temperature sensor cables that are routed together with the motor cable must be
twisted in pairs and shielded separately.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-30 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.3 Interface description

7.4.3.1 Overview

;
'5,9(&/L4LQWHUIDFH

;
(OHFWURQLFVSRZHUVXSSO\

/('

;
(QFRGHUV\VWHPFRQQHFWRU

3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
01P

Figure 7-13 Interface description of the SMC20

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-31
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.3.2 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Table 7-24 DRIVE-CLiQ interface X500

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 TXP Transmit data +
2 TXN Transmit data -
3 RXP Receive data +
4 Reserved, do not use
5 Reserved, do not use
6 RXN Receive data -
7 Reserved, do not use
8 Reserved, do not use
A Reserved, do not use
B GND (0 V) Electronic ground

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-32 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.3.3 X520 sensor system

Table 7-25 Sensor interface X520

Pin Signal name Technical specifications


1 P encoder Encoder power supply
2 M encoder Ground for encoder power supply
3 A Resolver signal A
4 A* Inverted resolver signal A
5 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
6 B Resolver signal B
7 B* Inverted resolver signal B
8 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
9 Reserved, do not use
10 EnDat_Clock, Clock, EnDat interface,
SSI_Clock SSI clock1)
11 Reserved, do not use
12 EnDat_Clock*, Inverted clock, EnDat interface,
SSI_Clock* Inverted SSI clock1)
13 +Temp Motor temperature measurement KTY+/PTC
14 5 V Sense Sense input encoder power supply
15 EnDat_Data, Data, EnDat interface,
SSI_Data SSI data1)
16 0 V Sense Ground sense input encoder power supply
17 R Reference signal R
18 R* Inverted reference signal R
19 C Absolute track signal C
20 C* Inverted absolute value signal C
21 D Absolute track signal D
22 D* Inverted absolute track signal D
23 EnDat_Data*, Inverted data, EnDat interface,
SSI_Data* Inverted SSI data
24 Ground Ground (for internal shield)
25 -Temp Motor temperature measurement KTY-/PTC
1) Only from Firmware 2.4 onwards

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-33
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.3.4 Electronics power supply X524

Table 7-26 Terminal block X524

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.35 A
M Electronic ground Maximum current via jumper in
connector: 20 A at 55°C
M Electronic ground

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix A)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.

7.4.3.5 Description of the LEDs on the SMC20

Table 7-27 Description of the LEDs on the SMC20

LED Color State Technical specifications


- OFF Electronics power supply is missing or outside permissible tolerance
range.
Green Steady light The component is ready for operation and cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ
communication is taking place.
Orange Steady light DRIVE-CLiQ communication is being established.
RDY At least one fault is present in this component. Note:
Red Steady light LED is driven irrespective of the corresponding messages being
reconfigured.
Green/ Flashing light Firmware is being downloaded.
Red 2 Hz
Green/Orange Component recognition via LED is activated (p0144)
or Flashing light Note:
Red/Orange 2 Hz Both options depend on the LED status when component recognition
is activated via p0144 = 1.

Cause and rectification of faults


The following reference contains further information about the cause and rectification of
faults:
Reference: /IH1/ SINAMICS Commissioning Manual.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-34 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.4 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-14 Dimension drawing of the SMC20

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-35
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.5 Mounting

Installation
1. Place the component on the DIN rail.
2. Snap the component on to the DIN rail. Make sure that the mounting slides at the rear
latch into place.
3. You can now move the component on the DIN rail to the left or to the right to its final
position.

Removal

3XVKWKHPRGXOH
IRUZDUG

0RXQWLQJVOLGH

3XVKOXJGRZQ

Figure 7-15 Releasing the component from a DIN rail

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-36 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.4 Sensor Module Cabinet 20 (SMC20)

7.4.6 Technical data

Table 7-28 Technical data

Unit Value
Electronics power supply
Voltage VDC 24 V DC (20.4 – 28.8)
Current ADC Max. 0.4
Power loss W <10
PE/ground connection At the housing with M4/1.8 Nm screw
Weight kg 0.8

Table 7-29 Max. frequency that can be evaluated (speed)

Resolver Max. speed resolver / motor


Number of poles Number of pole pairs 8kHz / 125 μsec 4kHz / 250 μsec 2kHz / 500 μsec
2-pole 1 120,000 RPM 60,000 RPM 30,000 RPM
4-pole 2 60,000 RPM 30,000 RPM 15,000 RPM
6-pole 3 40,000 RPM 20,000 RPM 10,000 RPM
8-pole 4 30,000 RPM 15,000 RPM 7,500 RPM

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-37
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5 7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.1 Introduction
An option module brake control is required for operating motors with holding brakes.
The option module brake control provides the electrical interface between the CU/PM340
and the brake of a motor. Two versions are available:
1. Brake Relay
2. Safe Brake Relay
This is mounted in the Screening Kit (refer to the Chapter "Screening Kit") or alternatively at
the rear cabinet panel.

7.5.2 Brake Relay

7.5.2.1 Description
The Brake Relay in conjunction with Power Modules, Blocksize format, can be used to
control a motor brake.
Using the Brake Relay, both 24 V DC as well as 1-ph. 240 V AC brakes can be operated.
The integrated relay is controlled from the Control Unit. The electrically isolated NC contact
is connected through a two-pole terminal.
The Brake Relay has the following interfaces:

Table 7-30 Overview of the Brake Relay interfaces

Type Number
Switch contact (NO contact) to control the motor 1
brake solenoid
Connection for the pre-fabricated (CTRL) to the 1
Power Module, Blocksize format
The supplied brake relay includes the cable harness for connection with the power module.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-38 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.2.2 Interface description

3(FRQQHFWLRQ 6ZLWFKFRQWDFW 12 &RQQHFWLRQIRUWKHSUHIDEULFDWHG


FRQWDFW WRFRQWUROWKH &75/ WRWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
PRWRUEUDNHVROHQRLG %ORFNVL]HIRUPDW

Figure 7-16 Interface description: Brake Relay

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-39
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH 30,)  3RZHU


0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFHWR&RQWURO8QLW&8 30
RU
&RQWURO8QLW$GDSWHU&8$

¦3

8 9: 3(

%UDNH5HOD\
&75/

0
a

3RZHUVXSSO\
0RWRUEUDNH

Figure 7-17 Connection example: Brake Relay

Brake connection

Table 7-31 Terminal block

Terminal Technical specifications


+ (BR+) Brake connection
- (BR-)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-40 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.2.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-18 Dimension drawing: Brake Relay

7.5.2.4 Technical data

Table 7-32 Technical data

Brake Relay
Switching capability of the NO contact Max. 250 VAC / 12 A
24 V DC / xx A
Max. cross-section that can be connected 2.5 mm2
Weight, approx. 0.16 kg

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-41
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.3 Safe Brake Relay


The Safe Brake Relay in conjunction with Power Modules of the Blocksize format can be
used to trigger a 24 V DC motor brake.
The brake is electronically controlled. All holding brakes can be used up to 2 A. To operate
the brake, it is necessary to connect the power supply voltage for the brake separately at the
option module brake control. In this case, a regulated power supply is necessary whose
rated value of 26 V should be able to be set, e.g. SITOP modular.

Table 7-33 Overview of the Safe Brake Relay interfaces

Type Number
Connection for the solenoid of the motor brake 1
Connection for a 24 V DC power supply 1
Connection for the pre-fabricated (CTRL) to the 1
Power Module, Blocksize format
The Safe Brake Relay includes the pre-fabricated cable to connect to the Power Module and
all of the customer connectors.

7.5.3.1 Safety Information

Note
A regulated DC power supply is required to operate motors with a built-in holding brake. The
voltage is supplied via the internal 24 V busbars. The voltage tolerances of the motor holding
brakes and the voltage drops of the connection cables must be taken into account.
The DC power supply should be set to 26 V. This ensures that the voltage supply for the
brake remains within the permissible range when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• Using Siemens three-phase motors
• Using Siemens MOTION-CONNECT power cables
• Motor cable lengths: max. 100 m

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-42 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.3.2 Interface description

&RQQHFWLRQIRUWKH &RQQHFWLRQ &RQQHFWLRQIRUWKHSUHIDEULFDWHG


PRWRUEUDNHVROHQRLG IRU9'&VXSSO\ FDEOH &75/ WRWKH3RZHU0RGXOH
%ORFNVL]HIRUPDW

Figure 7-19 Interface description: Safe Brake Relay

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-43
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

3RZHU
3RZHU0RGXOH,QWHUIDFH 30,)  0RGXOH
,QWHUIDFHWR&RQWURO8QLW&8 30
RU
&RQWURO8QLW$GDSWHU&8$

¦3

6DIH%UDNH5HOD\ 8 9: 3(

&2,/
 
H[W
  %5 0
9 *1' 0
0 %5 a

&75/

Figure 7-20 Connection example: Safe Brake Relay

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-44 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

Electronics power supply X524

Table 7-34 Terminal block X524

Terminal Function Technical specifications


+ Electronics power supply Voltage: 24 V (20.4 V – 28.8 V)
+ Electronics power supply Current consumption: max. 0.3 A (without
motor holding brake)
M Electronic ground
Maximum current via jumper in connector:
M Electronic ground 20 A at 55°C

Max. cross-section that can be connected: 2.5 mm²


Type: Screw terminal 2 (see Appendix)

Note
The two “+” and “M” terminals are jumpered in the connector. This ensures the supply
voltage is looped through.

Brake connection

Table 7-35 Terminal block

Terminal Technical specifications


+ (BR+) Brake connection
- (BR-)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-45
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.3.3 Dimension drawing

Figure 7-21 Dimension drawing: Safe Brake Relay

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-46 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.3.4 Mounting
The Safe Brake Relay can be mounted below the Power Module on the Screening Kit.

5HWDLQLQJVFUHZV

6DIH%UDNH5HOD\

Figure 7-22 Mounting the Safe Brake Relay on the Screening Kit (frame size A)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-47
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

6DIH%UDNH5HOD\

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

6DIH%UDNH5HOD\

0RXQWLQJVFUHZ

Figure 7-23 Mounting the Safe Brake Relay on the Screening Kit (frame sizes B and C)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-48 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

7.5.3.5 Technical data

Safe Brake Relay


Power supply voltage 20.4 ... 28.8 V DC
Recommended nominal value of the power supply voltage 26 V DC
(to equalize and compensate for the voltage drop along the feeder
cable to the 24 V DC solenoid of the motor brake)
Max. permissible current drain 2A
of the motor brake
Max. current requirements 0.3 A + the current drain of the motor brake
(at 24 V DC)
Max. cross-section that can be 2.5 mm2
connected
Weight, approx. 0.17 kg

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 7-49
Supplementary system components and encoder system integration
7.5 Option modules, brake control

Equipment Manual AC Drive


7-50 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories 8
8.1 8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

8.1.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland is used to connect two DRIVE-CLiQ cables and can be
installed in a cabinet panel.
At the interface outside the cabinet, a DRIVE-CLiQ connection is implemented with degree
of protection IP67 acc. to EN 60529; however, on the other hand inside the cabinet, a
connection with degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529. The interface
between the cabinet panel and DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland should have degree of protection
IP54 acc. to EN 60529.
In addition to the data lines, the power supply contacts of DRIVE-CLiQ are also routed via
the coupling.

8.1.2 Safety Information

Note
Only Siemens cables should be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-1
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

8.1.3 Interface description

8.1.3.1 Overview




Figure 8-1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland


2 Protective cap
3 IP67 acc. to EN 60529 interface
4 Mounting holes
5 Type plate
6 IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529 interface

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

8.1.4 Dimension drawing

 

 
 
Figure 8-2 Dimension drawing, DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

Accessories B [mm] T [mm] H [mm]


DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland (with 69.3 (2.72) 62.2 (2.44) 48 (1.88)
seal)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-3
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

š

5

 
 
 

Figure 8-3 Cutout for cabinet

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.1 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

8.1.5 Mounting


0
1P


&DELQHWSDQHO

'5,9(&/L4FDELQHWJODQG

Figure 8-4 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland

Installation
1. Make an opening in the cabinet panel according to the Chapter "Dimension drawing" for
the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland.
2. Insert the components from the outer side of the cabinet through the opening in the
cabinet.
3. Secure the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland to the outer cabinet panel using two M3 screws
and two nuts. In order to ensure good electromagnetic compatibility, a good electrical
connection must be established between the DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland and the cabinet
panel.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-5
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

8.1.6 Technical data

Table 8-1 Technical data

DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland Unit


6SL3066-2DA00-0AAx
Weight kg 0.135
Degree of protection IP20 or IPXXB acc. to EN 60529 in the electrical cabinet
IP54 to EN 60529 outside the electrical cabinet

8.2 8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

8.2.1 Description
The DRIVE-CLiQ coupling is used to connect two DRIVE-CLiQ cables in accordance with
degree of protection IP67 acc. to EN 60529.
In addition to the data lines, the power supply contacts of DRIVE-CLiQ are also routed via
the coupling.

8.2.2 Safety Information

Note
Only Siemens cables should be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

8.2.3 Interface description

8.2.3.1 Overview

 
 

Figure 8-5 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

1 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling
2 Type plate
3 Centering caps

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-7
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

8.2.4 Dimension drawing

% 7
E  

 
+

Figure 8-6 Dimension drawing, DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

Table 8-2 Dimensions of the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, all data in mm and (inches)

Accessories B [mm] b [mm] H [mm] T [mm]


DRIVE-CLiQ 111.5 (4.38) 57.1 (2.24) 61 (2.40) 38 (1.49)
coupling

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.2 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling

8.2.5 Installation

 

 
šRU01P   &RQWDFWVXUIDFHV

 
 

s
s

 
s
s
šRU01P

Figure 8-7 Hole drilling template for installation

1. Fit the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling to the mounting surface in accordance with the drilling
template.
2. Remove the protective caps on the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling.
3. Insert the DRIVE-CLiQ connector at both ends of the DRIVE-CLiQ coupling.

8.2.6 Technical data

Table 8-3 Technical data

DRIVE-CLiQ coupling 6FX2003- Unit


0DC1x
Weight kg 0.14
Degree of protection IP67 acc. to EN 60529

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-9
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

8.3 8.3 Screening Kit

Shielding methods
A Screening Kit is available as option for all frame sizes to connect the shield. This
Screening Kit is used to connect the shield of power cables. For frame sizes A to C, the
Screening Kit is directly mounted on the electrical cabinet panel and for frame sizes D to F, it
is screwed to the Power Module.

Figure 8-8 Power Module PM340 (frame sizes D, E) with CUA31 and Screening Kit

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

Table 8-4 Overview, Screening Kit, Part 1

Screening Kit
6SL3262- 1AA00-0BA0 1AB00-0DA0 1AC00-0DA0
with integrated line filter without line filter/ without line filter/
with integrated line filter with integrated line filter
Suitable for Power Module 1SE11-3UA0 1SE16-0UA0 1SE21-8UA0
6SL3210- 1SE11-7UA0 1SE17-7UA0 1SE22-5UA0
1SE12-2UA0 1SE21-0UA0 1SE23-2UA0
1SE13-1UA0
1SE14-1UA0
Frame size A B C

Table 8-5 Overview, Screening Kit, Part 2

Screening Kit
6SL3262- 1AD00-0DA0 1AD00-0DA0 1AF00-0DA0
with integrated line filter with integrated line filter with integrated line filter
Suitable for Power Module 1SE23-8UA0 1SE27-5UA0 1SE31-1UA0
6SL3210- 1SE24-5UA0 1SE31-0UA0 1SE31-5UA0
1SE26-0UA0 1SE31-8UA0
Frame size D E F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-11
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

8.3.1 Dimension drawings

   

 
 

  




 

Figure 8-9 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340 with Screening Kit and Brake Relay, Size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit





[





5
W\


S


 

$ 


0[





r


$ 
 $$




 
 S
W\ 
 5


 



š



 š



 



















Figure 8-10 Dimension drawing: Screening Kit, size B

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-13
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit




[
š












  
$




0[






$ 

$$

 (




š

 
  





 [š


 
 
(



























Figure 8-11 Dimension drawing: Screening Kit, size C

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

 
 
 

 
 

Figure 8-12 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340 with Screening Kit, size D

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-15
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

   

 

Figure 8-13 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340 with Screening Kit, size E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

   

 

Figure 8-14 Dimension drawing: Power Module 340 with Screening Kit, size F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-17
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

8.3.2 Mounting

Figure 8-15 Mounting: Power Module PM340 and Screening Kit, size A

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

Figure 8-16 Mounting: Power Module PM340 and Screening Kit, sizes B and C

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-19
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

Figure 8-17 Mounting: Power Module PM340 and Screening Kit, sizes D and E

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

Figure 8-18 Mounting: Power Module PM340 and Screening Kit, size F

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 8-21
Accessories
8.3 Screening Kit

Equipment Manual AC Drive


8-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
9
Cabinet design and EMC for components,
Blocksize format

9.1 9.1 Information

9.1.1 General
The SINAMICS S components are designed in accordance with degree of protection IP20 or
IPXXB acc. to EN 60529 and as open-type devices to UL 50. This ensures protection against
electric shocks. To ensure protection against mechanical stress and climatic conditions too,
the components should only be operated in housing/cabinets/rooms that fulfill at least degree
of protection IP54 and, as enclosure types, are designed to UL 50.
Prefabricated MOTION CONNECT cables are recommended.
The Safety-Integrated safety function:
The components must be protected against conducted contamination (e.g. by installing them
in a cabinet with degree of protection IP54).
Provided that conducted interference can be prevented at the installation site, the degree of
protection for the cabinet can be decreased accordingly.

Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies


Part 1: Type-tested and partially type-tested low-voltage switchgear assemblies
If the SINAMICS S drive line-up is used for the electrical equipment of machines, the
applicable requirements of EN 60204-1 must also be adhered to.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-1
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.1 Information

Safety of machinery
Electrical equipment of machines
Part 1: General requirements
All information for device selection in this section applies to
• Operation in a TN system
• Operating voltage range 1-ph. 200 V AC to 3-ph. 440 V AC

Danger
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

9.1.2 Safety information

Note
When installing the equipment in cabinets, the ventilation slots must be covered to prevent
drill swarf, wire end ferrules, and the like from falling into the housing.
Safety regulations governing shock protection must be observed. See also EN 60204–1.

Caution
To ensure that the encoder system works properly, you are advised to use the original
Siemens accessories from catalogs D21.1 and D21.2.
Only motors with a safe electrically isolated holding brake may be connected. The brake
conductors must also be safely electrically isolated.
If the motor power cable is connected to intermediate terminals, the power cables and brake
cables must be routed apart (≥ 300 mm).
After an intermediate terminal (e.g. due to a terminal block), it is best to continue routing
using the approved MOTION-CONNECT cable.

Warning
Cable shields and unused conductors of power cables (e.g. brake conductors) must be
connected to PE potential.
Non-observance can cause lethal shock voltages.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.2 Selection of Devices Required for Operating SINAMICS

9.2 9.2 Selection of Devices Required for Operating SINAMICS

9.2.1 General
The following components are required to connected to the line supply:
• Line disconnecting device
• Line fuse
• Line contactor (this is required for electrical isolation)
• Line filter (optional for Power Module PM340, frame size A)
• Line reactor (refer to Chapter Line supply connection)

9.2.2 Information about line disconnecting devices


The line disconnecting device for the electrical equipment may be used for correct isolation
of the drive line-up from the power supply. This line disconnecting device must be designed
for the electrical equipment of machines in accordance with the requirements of EN 60204-1,
Section 5.3. The relevant technical specifications must be taken into consideration for the
purpose of selecting the device. Other consumers of the electrical equipment must also be
taken into consideration when the device is selected.
The line disconnecting device must be equipped with a leading auxiliary switch (t ≥ 10 ms),
This must be integrated in the shutdown path of the Power Modules (EP terminals).
The accessories required for the line disconnecting device must be selected from the
manufacturer catalogs. See also catalog D21.2.

9.2.3 Overcurrent protection using line fuses or circuit-breakers


The cables for the drive line-up power supply must be protected against overcurrents. NH, D,
and DO-type fuses with a gL characteristic or suitable circuit-breakers can be used for this
purpose.

Note
The devices can be connected to line supplies up to 480 VAC, which can supply a maximum
of 36 kA symmetrical ("uninfluenced current" acc. to EN 60269-1).

For further information: Refer to Catalog D21.2.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-3
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.2 Selection of Devices Required for Operating SINAMICS

9.2.4 Line Contactors


Line contactors are required to provide electrical isolation between the drive line-up and the
line supply.
When selecting a line contactor, the characteristic values in the technical data apply. The
cable routing, the bundling factor and the factor for the ambient temperature according to
EN 60204-1 must be taken into account when dimensioning the various cables.

Caution
Line contactors must not be switched under load.

When the digital output is used to control the line contactor, its making/breaking capacity
must be taken into account.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage

9.3 9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage

9.3.1 General
The 24 V DC voltage is required for the power supply of:
1. The load voltage of the Control Unit digital outputs.
The Control Units are supplied with power via the PM-IF. 24 V must also be connected in
the following cases:
– Commissioning / diagnostics when the Power Module power supply voltage is
switched-out.
– Using the digital outputs CU310
2. The electronics of the Sensor Module
3. The Safe Brake Relay (motor holding brake)
Other loads can be connected to these power supply units if they are separately protected
from overcurrent.

Notice
If other consumers are connected to the power supply, connected inductance devices
(contactors, relays) must be fitted with suitable overvoltage protection circuits.

Notice
A regulated DC power supply is required to operate motors with a built-in holding brake. The
power is supplied via the 24 V connection (Safe Brake Relay). The voltage tolerances of the
motor holding brakes and the voltage drops of the connection cables must be taken into
account.
The DC power supply should be set to 26 V. This ensures that the voltage supply for the
brake remains within the permissible range when the following conditions are fulfilled:
• Using Siemens three-phase motors
• Using Siemens MOTION-CONNECT power cables
Motor cable lengths: max. 100 m

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-5
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage

9.3.2 Selecting power supply units


You are advised to use the devices in the following table. These devices meet the applicable
requirements of EN 60204-1.

Table 9-1 Recommended SITOP Power

Rated output current [A] Input voltage range [V] Short-circuit current [A] Order No.
5 2AC 85-132/170 – 550 5.5 6EP1333-3BA00
10 2AC 85-132/176 – 550 30 for 25 ms 6EP1334-3BA00
20 3AC 320 – 550 23 6EP1336-3BA00
40 3AC 320 – 550 46 6EP1337-3BA00

Table 9-2 Recommendation for Control Supply Module

Rated output current [A] Input voltage range [V] Short-circuit current [A] Order No.
20 3-ph. 380 V AC -10% (-15% < 1 < 24 6SL3100-1DE22-0AA0
min) to 3-ph. 480 V AC +10%
DC 300 – 800
See catalog D21.2.

Warning
When an external power supply is used (e.g. SITOP), the ground potential must be
connected to the protective conductor system (PELV).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage

9.3.3 24 V component current consumption


A separate 24 V power supply must be used for the SINAMICS S120 drive line-up.
The following table can be used to calculate the 24 V DC power supply. The values for
typical current consumption are used as a basis for configuration.

Table 9-3 Overview of 24 V DC current consumption

Component Typical current consumption [ADC]


CU320 0.8
CU310 DP for each digital output 0.8
CU310 PN for each digital output 0.8
CUA31 for each digital output 0.15
DRIVE-CLiQ (e.g. motors with DRIVE-CLiQ interface) Typ. 0.25, max. 0.45
Brake (e.g. motor holding brake) Typ. 0.4 to 1.1; max. 2
Sensor Module Cabinet
SMC10 0.2
SMC20 0.2
Sensor Module External
SME20 0.11
SME25 0.11
SME120 0.16
SME125 0.16

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-7
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.3 24 V DC Supply Voltage

9.3.4 Overcurrent Protection


Cables on both the primary and the secondary side of the power supply unit must be
protected from overcurrent. Primary side protection must be implemented according to the
manufacturer's instructions. Secondary side protection must be rated to deal with the actual
conditions. In particular:
• Loading due to loads, possibly the simultaneity factor in response to machine operation
• Current carrying capacity of the conductors used and cables in normal and short-circuit
conditions
• Ambient temperature
• Cable bundling (e.g. laying in a common duct)
• Cable laying method to EN 60204-1
EN 60204-1, Section 14, can be used to determine the overcurrent protection devices.
Circuit-breakers from the Siemens NSK catalog are recommended as overcurrent protection
devices on the primary side, and miniature circuit-breakers or SITOP select 6EP1961-2BA00
as overcurrent protection devices on the secondary side. The MCBs can be selected
according to Siemens catalog "BETA Modular Installation Devices - ET B1".
Miniature circuit-breakers are recommended as overcurrent protective device for cables and
busbars. The ground potential M must be connected to the protective conductor system
(PELV).
When selecting the circuit-breaker, the following standards must be carefully observed:
EN 61800-5-1, EN 60204-1, IEC 60364-5-52, IEC 60287-1 to -3, EN 60228 and UL 508C.
In so doing, the following conditions for the conductors/cables must be carefully taken into
consideration:
• Ambient temperature 55 °C
• Limiting conductor temperature ≥ 75 °C for operation with the rated load current
• Cable length max.:
– 10 m for the supply cables
– 30 m for signal lines
In addition, the conductors/cables should be routed so that
• Max. 1 conductor pair is bundled, and
• The 24 V conductors/cables must be routed separately from other cables and conductors
that can conduct operating currents.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.4 Arrangement of components and equipment

Table 9-4 MCBs by conductor cross-section and temperature

Conductor cross-section Max. value up to 40 °C Max. value up to 55°C


1.5 mm2 10 A 6A
2.5 mm2 16 A 10 A
4 mm2 25 A 16 A
6 mm2 32 A 20 A
The trip characteristic of the MCBs must be selected to match the loads to be protected and
the max. current provided by the power supply unit in the event of a short-circuit.

9.4 9.4 Arrangement of components and equipment

9.4.1 General
The arrangement of the components and equipment takes account of
• Space requirements
• Cable routing
• Bending radius of connection cables
For MOTION-CONNECT cables, see catalog D21.1 or D21.2.
• Heat dissipation
• EMC
Components are usually located centrally in a cabinet.
The mounting clearances necessary above and below the components can, under certain
circumstances, exceed the minimum clearances specified in the product documentation.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-9
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.4 Arrangement of components and equipment

9.4.2 Mounting
The components should be mounted on a conductive mounting surface to ensure low
impedance between the component and the mounting surface. Mounting plates with a
galvanized surface are suitable.

Figure 9-1 Mounting the CU310 onto the Power Module 340 (frame size D)

Wiring rules for DRIVE-CLiQ


Refer to /IH1/ SINAMICS Commissioning Manual.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing

9.5 9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable


Routing

9.5.1 General
Requirements to implement EMC are listed in EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61800-3,
EN 60204-1 and in the EMC Design Directives - Order No. 6FC5297-☐AD30-0AP☐.
Conformance with the EMC Directive of the EC can be secured by following the measures
described in the EMC Design Directives.
When mounting components in cabinets, in order to fulfill the EMC directive, the following
conditions must be additionally observed:
• Connected to TN line supply systems with grounded neutral point
• SINAMICS line filter (optional for frame size A)
• Observance of information about cable shielding and equipotential bonding
• Only the recommended Siemens power and signal cables are used
• Only cables from Siemens must be used for DRIVE-CLiQ connections.
For MOTION-CONNECT cables refer to catalog D21.1 or D21.2

Caution
If couplings or cabinet glands are required for the DRIVE-CLiQ connections, then only the
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling and DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, described in the Chapter
Accessories, may be used.

Danger
If the shielding procedures described and the specified cable lengths are not observed, the
machine may not operate properly.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-11
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing

9.5.2 Cable Shielding and Routing


In order to comply with the EMC requirements, certain cables must be routed apart from
other cables and from certain components. To full EMC requirements, the following cables
must be used with shields:
• Power supply cables from line filter via line reactor to Power Module
• All motor cables (if necessary, including cables for motor holding brake)
• Cables for "fast inputs" of the Control Unit
• Cables for analog direct voltage/current signals
• Signal cables for sensors
• Cables for temperature sensors
Alternative measures (e.g. routing behind mounting plates, suitable clearances) can also be
used provided they have similar results. This excludes measures that relate to the design,
installation, and routing of motor power cables and signal cables. If unshielded cables are
used between the line connection point and line filter, make sure that no interfering cables
are routed in parallel.
The cable shields must be connected as close to the conductor terminal connections as
possible to ensure a low-impedance connection with cabinet ground.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing

 

 

Figure 9-2 Shielding of a Power Module PM340

1. Line supply input


2. Motor cable
3. Rear metal panel
4. Use suitable clamps/clips to reliably connect the shield of the motor and field cable to the
rear metal panel.
5. Shielded cable
Alternatively, the cable shields can be connected to them metal mounting plate using pipe
clamps and serrated rails. The cable length between the shield contact point and the
terminals for cable conductors must be kept as short as possible.
Shield connection plates with pre-prepared clip contacts are available for connecting the
shields for power cables of Power Modules.
All cables inside the cabinet must be connected as closely as possible to parts connected
with cabinet ground, such as a mounting plate or cabinet wall. Ducts made of sheet steel or
routing cables between between steel sheets (e.g. between the mounting plate and back
wall) should provide adequate shielding.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-13
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing

Avoid, where possible, routing unshielded cables, connected to the drive line-up, in the
immediate vicinity of noise sources, e.g. transformers. Signal lines (shielded and unshielded)
connected to the drive line-up, must be routed as far as possible away from strong external
magnetic fields (e.g. transformers, line reactors). In both cases, a distance of ≥ 300 mm is
usually sufficient.

Signal and DC power supply cables


Operating unshielded signal and direct current supply cables (e.g. 24 V infeed with external
supply):
• Direct current supply cables: Max. permissible length: 10 m
• Unshielded signal cables: Max. permissible length: 30 m (without additional wiring)
For greater lengths, suitable wiring must be connected by the user to provide overvoltage
protection. For example:

Table 9-5 Recommendations for overvoltage protection

DC supply 24 V signal cables


Weidmüller Weidmüller
Type no.: PU DS 24V 16A Type no.: MCZ OVP TAZ
Weidmüller GmbH & Co. KG
An der Talle 89
33102 Paderborn
Tel. 05252/960-0
Fax 05252/960-116
www.weidmueller.com

Caution
The connected signal and power cables must not cover the ventilation slots.

Caution
Unshielded signal cables must not be routed parallel to power cables.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.5 Information about Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Cable Routing

9.5.3 Equipotential bonding


The SINAMICS S drive system is designed for use in cabinets with a PE conductor
connection.
If the drive line-up is arranged on a common unpainted metal-surfaced mounting plate, e.g.
with a galvanized surface, no additional equipotential bonding is needed within the drive line-
up as
• All parts of the switchgear assembly are connected to the protective conductor system.
• The mounting plate is connected with the external PE conductor by means of a finely-
stranded copper conductor with a cross-section of 16 mm², including the outer conductor.
From a cross-section of 25 mm² copper, the outer cross-section of the finely-stranded
conductor is halved.
For other installation methods, equipotential bonding must be implemented using conductor
cross-sections as stated in the second item in the list or at least equal to the conductance.
If components are mounted on DIN rails, the data listed in the second item applies for
equipotential bonding. If only smaller connection cross-sections are permissible on
components, the largest must be used (e.g. 6 mm2 for TM31 and SMC). These requirements
also apply to distributed components located outside the cabinet.
For a PROFIBUS connection between two cabinets, a finely stranded potential bonding
connector should be used with a cross-section of 4 mm2 . This conductor must be routed
alongside the PROFIBUS cable.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-15
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.6 Connection Methods

9.6 9.6 Connection Methods

9.6.1 Screw terminals

Connectable conductor cross-sections of screw terminals

Table 9-6 Screw terminals

Screw terminal type


1 Connectable conductor cross- Flexible 0.14 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
sections With wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 1.5 mm2
With wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 0.5 mm2
Insulation stripping length 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.4 x 2.0 mm
Tightening torque 0.22 to 0.25 Nm
2 Connectable conductor cross- Flexible 0.2 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
sections With wire end ferrule, without plastic sleeve 0.25 mm2 to 1 mm2
With wire end ferrule, with plastic sleeve 0.5 mm2 to 1 mm2
Insulation stripping length 7 mm
Tool Screwdriver 0.6 x 3.5 mm
Tightening torque 0.5 to 0.6 Nm

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

9.7 9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

9.7.1 General
Electrical cabinets can be cooled, using among other things the following:
• filtered fans
• heat exchangers or
• cooling units.
The decision in favor of one of these methods will depend on the prevailing ambient
conditions and the cooling power required.
The air routing within the electrical cabinet and the cooling clearances specified here must
be observed. No other components or cables must be located in these areas.

Caution
If you do not observe the guidelines for installing SINAMICS equipment in the cabinet, this
can reduce the service life of the equipment and result in premature component failure.

You must take into account the following specifications when mounting/installing SINAMICS
components:
• Cooling clearance
• Cable routing
• Air guidance, air-conditioner

Table 9-7 Cooling clearances around the components

Component Clearance above and below Lateral clearance


in mm and (inches) in mm and (inches)
CU310 DP 50 (1.97) 0
CU310 PN 50 (1.97) 0
CUA31 50 (1.97) 0
SMCxx 50 (1.97) 0
Line filters 100 (3.93)
Line reactors 100 (3.93) 0
PM340, Blocksize, frame size A 100 (3.93) 30 (1.18)
PM340, Blocksize, frame size B 100 (3.93) 40 (1.57)
PM340, Blocksize, frame size C 125 (4.92) 50 (1.97)
PM340 Blocksize, frame sizes D and E 300 (11.81) 0
PM340, Blocksize, frame size F 350 (13.77) 0

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-17
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

0RXQWLQJVXUIDFH

:DUPGLVFKDUJHGDLU
PP

$LULQOHW PP

Figure 9-3 Cooling clearances

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

9.7.2 Ventilation
The SINAMICS equipment is ventilated separately by means of integrated fans and is in
some cases cooled by means of natural convection.
The cooling air must flow through the components vertically from bottom (cooler region) to
top (region heated by operation).
If filtered fans, heat exchangers, or air conditioners are used, you must ensure that the air is
flowing in the right direction. You must also ensure that the warm air can escape at the top.
A cooling clearance of at least 80 mm above and below must be observed.

Note
Cables must not be routed on the components; the ventilation meshes must not be covered.
Cold air must not be allowed to blow directly onto electronic equipment.

Note
The distance between the blow-out aperture of the air conditioner and the electronic
equipment must be at least 200 mm.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-19
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

&RROLQJXQLWV

FDELQHWBYHQWLODWLRQYVG
&RQWUROFDELQHW

Figure 9-4 Examples of cabinet ventilation

Caution
The air guidance and arrangement of the cooling equipment must be chosen in such a way
as to prevent condensation from forming.
If necessary, cabinet enclosure heating may have to be installed.

If air conditioners are used, the relative air humidity of the expelled air increases as the air in
the air conditioner cools and may exceed the dew point. If the relative humidity of the air
entering the SINAMICS equipment is over 80% for an extended period of time, the insulation
in the equipment may fail to function properly due to electrochemical reactions (refer to
System Overview). Using air baffle plates, for example, you must ensure that the cold air
expelled from the air conditioner mixes with warm air in the cabinet before it enters the
equipment. This reduces the relative air humidity to uncritical values.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

9.7.3 Power Loss of Components in Rated Operation


The following table shows the power loss for components. The characteristic values apply for
the following conditions:
• Line supply voltage for Power Modules 1-ph. 200 V AC to 3-ph. 380 V to
480 V AC ±10 %.
• Pulse frequency of the Power Modules 4 kHz
• Rated pulse frequency of the Power Modules 8 kHz
• Operating components at their rated power

Table 9-8 Overview of power losses

Unit Power loss


Control Units
CU320 W 20
CU310 DP W 20
CU310 PN W 20
CUA31 W 7.2
Line reactors W Refer to Line reactors,
for Power Modules Blocksize Chapter "Technical data".
Line filter W Refer to Line filter,
for Power Modules Blocksize Chapter "Technical data".
PM340 W Refer to Power Modules,
Chapter "Technical data".
Sensor Modules
SMC10 W < 10
SMC20 W < 10

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 9-21
Cabinet design and EMC for components, Blocksize format
9.7 Information on cabinet cooling

Equipment Manual AC Drive


9-22 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance 10
10.1 10.1 Safety information

Danger
Only Siemens customer service, repair centers that have been authorized by Siemens or
authorized personnel may repair drive equipment. Al of the persons involved must have in-
depth knowledge of all of the warnings and operating instructions as listed in this Manual.
All damaged parts or components must be replaced only using parts and components that
are listed in the relevant spare parts list.

Danger
Before starting any work, after the specified waiting time has elapsed, carefully measure the
voltage! The voltage can be measured between the DC link terminals DCP and DCN and
must be below 42.2 V DC.

Danger
If the auxiliary 230 V AC supplies are present, then a hazardous voltage is present at the
components even when the main switch is in the open state.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-1
Service and maintenance
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

10.2 10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

10.2.1 Replacing hardware components

Notice
Hardware components may only be replaced when in the no-voltage state!

The following components can be replaced with replacement/exchange components with the
same Order No.:
• Power Modules
• DRIVE-CLiQ components
• Control Units

10.2.2 Replacing the fan


• CU310 DP: In order to replace the fan, the plastic housing must be removed by releasing
all of the catches one after the other using a screwdriver. The fan can then be withdrawn
from the front without requiring any tools and replaced.
Only qualified trained personnel may replace the cU310 DP fan strictly adhering to ESD
instructions.
Qualified and trained personnel should also reset the operating hours counter of the fan
to 0 at the same time.
The fan can be ordered as spare part.
• CU310 PN: In order to replace the fan, the plastic housing must be removed by releasing
all of the catches one after the other using a screwdriver. The fan can then be withdrawn
from the front without requiring any tools and replaced.
Only qualified trained personnel may replace the cU310 PN fan strictly adhering to ESD
instructions.
Qualified and trained personnel should also reset the operating hours counter of the fan
to 0 at the same time.
The fan can be ordered as spare part.
• PM340: For all frame sizes, the fans are accessible from the outside. For frame sizes A to
C, a Phillips screwdriver is required.
The fan can be ordered as spare part.
• The CUA31 does not have a fan.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

$ %

Figure 10-1 Replacing a fan for a Power Module PM340, frame size A

(tightening torque 0.4 Nm)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-3
Service and maintenance
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

$ %

Figure 10-2 Replacing a fan for a Power Module PM340, frame sizes B and C

(tightening torque 0.4 Nm)

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

Figure 10-3 Replacing a fan for a Power Module PM340, frame sizes D and E

1. Removing the cover using a suitable tool.


2. Withdraw the two connectors shown and lift-out the fan.
3. Use the new fan and insert both connectors.
4. Close the protective cover.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-5
Service and maintenance
10.2 Service and maintenance for components, Blocksize format

Figure 10-4 Replacing the fan for a Power Module PM340, frame size F

1. Release the screws and remove the cover.


2. Withdraw the two connectors shown and lift-out the fan.
3. Insert the new fan, locate both connectors, close the cover and tighten the screws
(tightening torque, 3.0 Nm).

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3 10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components


Maintenance is intended to ensure that the equipment remains in the specified condition. Dirt
and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear replaced.
The following points must generally be observed.

Dust deposits
Dust deposits inside the device must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once a
year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations. The unit must be
cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry compressed air (max. 1 bar) for areas
that cannot be easily reached.

Ventilation
The ventilation openings in the device must never be obstructed. The fans must be checked
to make sure that they are functioning correctly.

Cable and screw terminals


Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in
position, and if necessary, retightened. Cabling must be checked for defects. Defective parts
must be replaced immediately.

Note
The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the
installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions.
Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details,
contact your regional office or sales office.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-7
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.1 Maintenance
Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the operating
condition of the devices.

Required tools
The following tools are required for replacing components:
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 10)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 13)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 16/17)
• Spanner or socket spanner (w/f 18/19)
• Hexagon-socket spanner (size 8)
• Torque wrench up to 50 Nm
• Screwdriver size 1 / 2
• Screwdriver Torx T20
• Screwdriver Torx T30

Tightening torques for current-carrying parts


When securing connections for current-carrying parts (line supply, motor connections,
busbars), you must observe the following tightening torques.

Table 10-1 Tightening torques for connecting current-carrying parts

Screw Torque
M6 6 Nm
M8 13 Nm
M10 25 Nm
M12 50 Nm

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.2 Installation equipment

Description
The installation equipment is used to install and remove the power blocks for Power Modules
in the Chassis format.
It is used as an installation aid, which is placed in front of and secured to the module. The
telescopic guide support allows the withdrawable device to be adjusted according to the
height at which the power blocks are installed. Once the mechanical and electrical
connections have been removed, the power block can be removed from the module,
whereby the power block is guided and supported by the guide rails on the withdrawable
devices.

Figure 10-5 Installation equipment

Order No.
Order number for the installation device: 6SL3766-1FA00-0AA0.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-9
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.3 Replacing components

10.3.3.1 Safety information

Danger
When transporting the devices and replacing components, note the following:
• Some of the devices and components are heavy or top heavy.
• Due to their weight, the devices must be handled with care by trained personnel.
• Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices
are not lifted or transported properly.

Danger
The equipment is operated with hazardous voltages
All connection wok must be carried-out in a no-voltage condition!
All work on the units must be carried out by trained personnel only. Death, serious injury, or
substantial material damage can result if these warnings are not taken into account.
Work on an open device must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply
voltages may be present. The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor
is not running.
Dangerously high voltage levels are still present in the cabinet up to five minutes after it has
been disconnected due to the DC link capacitors. For this reason, the cabinet should not be
opened until after a reasonable period of time has elapsed.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-10 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.3.2 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size FX

Replacing the Powerblock

Figure 10-6 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size FX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-11
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
• Allow unimpeded access to the power block.
• Remove the front cover.

Removal
The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the previous diagram.
1. Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section (3 screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the line supply (3 screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (2 screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (2 screws).
5. Remove the DRIVE-CLiQ cables and connections on –X41 / –X42 (5 plugs).
6. Remove the retaining elements of the electronic module (2 nuts) and carefully remove the
electronics module.
When removing the electronics module, 5 additional connectors (2 at the top, 3 at the
bottom) must be removed one after the other.
7. Disconnect the plugs for the fiber optic cables and signal cables (5 plugs).
8. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de-installing the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Caution
When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation
To re-install the fan, carry out the above steps in reverse order.

Caution
You must observe the specified tightening torques.
Carefully re-establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-12 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.3.3 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size GX

Replacing the Powerblock







Figure 10-7 Replacing the Powerblock, Power Module, frame size GX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-13
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
• Allow unimpeded access to the power block.
• Remove the front cover.

Removal
The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with Fig. 8-3.
1. Unscrew the connection to the outgoing motor section (3 screws).
2. Unscrew the connection to the line supply (3 screws).
3. Remove the retaining screws at the top (2 screws).
4. Remove the retaining screws at the bottom (2 screws).
5. Remove the retaining element of the electronic module (1 nut) and carefully remove the
electronics module.
When removing the electronics module, 5 additional connectors (2 at the top, 3 at the
bottom) must be removed one after the other.
6. Disconnect the connectors for the fiber optic cables (5 plugs) and release the cable
connection for the signal cables (2 connectors).
7. Disconnect the plug for the thermocouple.
8. Unscrew the two retaining screws for the fan and attach the tool for de-installing the
power block at this position.
You can now remove the power block.

Caution
When removing the power block, ensure that you do not damage any signal cables.

Installation
To re-install the fan, carry out the above steps in reverse order.

Caution
You must observe the specified tightening torques.
Carefully re-establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-14 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.3.4 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size FX

Replacing the fan

Figure 10-8 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size FX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-15
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables, including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet
protection and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
• Allow unimpeded access.
• Remove the front cover.

Removal
The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the previous diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan (2 screws).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

Caution
When removing the fan, ensure that the cables are not damaged.

Installation
To re-install the fan, carry out the above steps in reverse order.

Caution
You must observe the specified tightening torques.
Carefully re-establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-16 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

10.3.3.5 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size GX

Replacing the fan

Figure 10-9 Replacing the fan, Power Module, frame size GX

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-17
Service and maintenance
10.3 Service and maintenance for Chassis format components

Description
The average service life of the device fans is 50,000 hours. In practice, however, the service
life depends on other variables, including ambient temperature and the degree of cabinet
protection and, therefore, may deviate from this value.
The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure that the device is available.

Preparatory steps
• Disconnect the drive line-up from the power supply.
• Allow unimpeded access.
• Remove the front cover.

Removal
The steps for the removal procedure are numbered in accordance with the previous diagram.
1. Remove the retaining screws for the fan (3 screws).
2. Disconnect the supply cables (1 x "L", 1 x "N").
You can now carefully remove the fan.

Caution
When removing the fan, ensure that the cables are not damaged.

Installation
To re-install the fan, carry out the above steps in reverse order.

Caution
You must observe the specified tightening torques.
Carefully re-establish the plug connections and ensure that they are secure.

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-18 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Service and maintenance
10.4 Spare parts

10.4 10.4 Spare parts

Table 10-2 Spare parts list AC/AC Chassis (status 31.03.2006)

Order No.
Powerblock
Powerblock for AC Drive/Power Module, 400V, 210A, complete 6SL3351-1AE32-1AA1
Powerblock for AC Drive/Power Module, 400V, 260A, complete 6SL3351-1AE32-6AA1
Powerblock for AC Drive/Power Module, 400V, 310A, complete 6SL3351-1AE33-1AA1
Powerblock for AC Drive/Power Module, 400V, 380A, complete 6SL3351-1AE33-8AA1
Powerblock for AC Drive/Power Module, 400V, 490A, complete 6SL3351-1AE35-0AA1

CIB module
CIB for SINAMICS S Power Module, 400V, 210A 6SL3351-6TE32-1AA3
CIB for SINAMICS S Power Module, 400V, 260A 6SL3351-6TE32-6AA3
CIB for SINAMICS S Power Module, 400V, 310A 6SL3351-6TE33-1AA3
CIB for SINAMICS S Power Module, 400V, 380A 6SL3351-6TE33-8AA3
CIB for SINAMICS S Power Module, 400V, 490A 6SL3351-6TE35-0AA3

Terminal block X9
Terminal strip X9, chassis unit AC/AC A5E00379194

Power supply PSB


Power supply 400V/500 V 6SL3352-6BE00-0AA1

Fans
Spare fan for the CU310 6SL3064-0AC00-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame size A 1 x 6SL3200-0SF01-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame size B 2 x 6SL3200-0SF01-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame size C 2 x 6SL3200-0SF03-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame sizes D / E 38 A / 45 A and 75 A 1 x 6SL3200-0SF04-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame sizes D / E 60 A and 90 A 1 x 6SL3200-0SF05-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame sizes F 110 A and 145 A 1 x 6SL3200-0SF06-0AA0
Spare fan for Power Module, frame size F 178 A 1 x 6SL3200-0SF07-0AA0

Fan, format FX
Fan, chassis unit frame size FX 400V, 210A 6SL3362-0AF00-0AA1
Fan, chassis unit frame size FX 400V, 260A 6SL3362-0AF01-0AA1

Fan, format GX
Fan, chassis unit frame size GX, H and J 400V 6SL3362-0AG00-0AA1

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 10-19
Service and maintenance
10.4 Spare parts

Order No.
Fan fuse FX
Fan fuses, frame size FX 400V, 210A 6SL3352-7BE32-1AA1
Fan fuses, frame size FX 400V 6SL3352-7BE32-6AA0

Fan fuse GX
Fan fuses, frame size GX 400V 6SL3352-7BE35-0AA0

Fan transformer FX
Fan transformer, frame size FX 400V, 210A 6SL3352-7AE32-1AA1
Fan transformer, frame size FX 400V, 260A 6SL3352-7AE32-6AA1

Fan transformer GX
Fan transformer, frame size GX 400V 6SL3352-7AE35-0AA1

Door, format FX
Door SINAMICS Power Module, frame size FX 6SL3361-3AF02-0AA0

Door, format GX
Door SINAMICS Power Module, frame size GX 6SL3361-3AG02-0AA0

Equipment Manual AC Drive


10-20 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
A List of abbreviations/acronyms A
A.1 A.1 List of abbreviations

Table A-1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


A
A... Warnung Alarm
AC Wechselstrom Alternating Current
ADC Analog-Digital-Konverter Analog Digital Converter
AI Analogeingang Analog Input
ALM Active Line Module Active Line Module
AO Analogausgang Analog Output
AOP Advanced Operator Panel Advanced Operator Panel
APC Advanced Positioning Control Advanced Positioning Control
ASC Ankerkurzschluss Armature Short-Circuit
ASCII Amerikanische Code-Norm für den American Standard Code for Information
Informationsaustausch Interchange
ASM Asynchronmotor Induction motor
B
OC Betriebsbedingung Operating Condition
BERO Firmenname für einen Näherungsschalter Tradename for a type of proximity switch
BI Binektoreingang Binector Input
BIA Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut für
Arbeitssicherheit Arbeitssicherheit (German Institute for
Occupational Safety)
BICO Binektor-Konnektor-Technologie Binector Connector Technology
BLM Basic Line Module Basic Line Module
BOP Basic Operator Panel Basic Operator Panel
C
C Kapazität Capacitance
C... Safety-Meldung Safety message
CAN Controller Area Network Controller Area Network
CBC Kommunikationsbaugruppe CAN Communication Board CAN
CBP Kommunikationsbaugruppe PROFIBUS Communication Board PROFIBUS
CD Compact Disc Compact Disc
CDS Befehlsdatensatz Command Data Set

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 A-1
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


CI Konnektoreingang Connector Input
CNC Computerunterstützte numerische Steuerung Computer Numerical Control
CO Konnektorausgang Connector Output
CO/BO Konnektor-/Binektorausgang Connector Output/Binector Output
COB-ID CAN Object-Identification CAN Object-Identification
COM Mittelkontakt eines Wechselkontaktes Common contact of a change-over relay
CP Kommunikationsprozessor Communications Processor
CPU Zentralbaugruppe Central Processing Unit
CRC Checksummenprüfung Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSM Control Supply Module Control Supply Module
CU Control Unit Control Unit
D
DAC Digital-Analog-Konverter Digital Analog Converter
DC Gleichstrom Direct Current
DCN Gleichstrom negativ Direct Current Negative
DCP Gleichstrom positiv Direct Current Positive
DDS Antriebsdatensatz Drive Data Set
DI Digitaleingang Digital Input
DI/DO Digitaleingang/-ausgang bidirektional Bidirectional Digital Input/Output
DMC DRIVE-CLiQ Module Cabinet (Hub) DRIVE-CLiQ Module Cabinet (Hub)
DO Digitalausgang Digital Output
DO Antriebsobjekt Drive Object
DPRAM Speicher mit beidseitigem Zugriff Dual-Port Random Access Memory
DRAM Dynamischer Speicher Dynamic Random Access Memory
DRIVE CLiQ Drive Component Link with IQ Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC Dynamic Servo Control Dynamic Servo Control
E
EDS Geberdatensatz Encoder Data Set
EGB Elektrostatisch gefährdete Baugruppen Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD)
ELP Erdschlussüberwachung Earth Leakage Protection
EMK Elektromagnetische Kraft Electromagnetic Force (EMF)
EMV Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
EN Europäische Norm European Standard
EnDat Geber-Schnittstelle Encoder-Data-Interface
EP Impulsfreigabe Enable Pulses
EPOS Einfachpositionierer Basic positioner
ES Engineering System Engineering System
ESB Ersatzschaltbild Equivalent circuit diagram
ESR Erweitertes Stillsetzen und Rückziehen Extended Stop and Retract
F
F… Störung Fault
FAQ Häufig gestellte Fragen Frequently Asked Questions

Equipment Manual AC Drive


A-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


FCC Function Control Chart Function Control Chart
FCC Flussstromregelung Flux Current Control
FEM Fremderregter Synchronmotor Separately excited synchronous motor
FEPROM Schreib- und Lesespeicher nichtflüchtig Flash-EPROM
FG Funktionsgenerator Function Generator
FI Fehlerstrom Residual Current
FP Funktionsplan Function diagram
FW Firmware Firmware
G
GB Gigabyte Gigabyte
GC Global-Control-Telegramm (Broadcast- Global Control Telegram (broadcast telegram)
Telegramm)
GSD Gerätestammdatei: beschreibt die Merkmale Device master file: describes the features of a
eines PROFIBUS-Slaves PROFIBUS slave
GSV Gate Supply Voltage Gate Supply Voltage
H
HF Hochfrequenz High Frequency
HFD Hochfrequenzdrossel High frequency reactor
HLG Hochlaufgeber Ramp-function generator
HMI Mensch-Maschine-Schnittstelle Human Machine Interface
HTL Logik mit hoher Störschwelle High Threshold Logic
HW Hardware Hardware
I
i. V. in Vorbereitung: diese Eigenschaft steht zur Zeit In preparation: this feature is currently not
nicht zur Verfügung available
IBN Inbetriebnahme Commissioning
I/O Eingang/Ausgang Input/Output
ID Identifizierung Identifier
IEC Internationale Norm in der Elektrotechnik International Electrotechnical Commission
IGBT Bipolartransistor mit isolierter Steuerelektrode Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
IL Impulslöschung Pulse suppression
IT Drehstromversorgungsnetz ungeerdet Insulated three-phase line supply
IVP Interner Spannungsschutz Internal Voltage Protection
J
JOG Tippen Jogging
K
KDV Kreuzweiser Datenvergleich Data cross-checking
KIP Kinetische Pufferung Kinetic buffering
Kp Proportionalverstärkung Proportional gain
KTY Spezieller Temperatursensor Positive temperature coefficient temperature
sensor

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 A-3
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


L
L Induktivität Inductance
LED Leuchtdiode Light Emitting Diode
LIN Linear motor Linear motor
LSB Niederwertigstes Bit Least Significant Bit
LSS Netzschalter Line Side Switch
LU Längeneinheit Length Unit
M
M Masse Reference potential, zero potential
MB Megabyte Megabyte
MCC Motion Control Chart Motion Control Chart
MDS Motordatensatz Motor Data Set
MLFB Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung Machine-readable product designation
MMC Mensch Maschine Kommunikation Man Machine Communication
MSB Höchstwertigstes Bit Most Significant Bit
MSCY_C1 Zyklische Kommunikation zwischen Master Master Slave Cycle Class 1
(Klasse 1) und Slave
MT Messtaster Measuring probe
N
N. C. Nicht angeschlossen Not Connected
N... Keine Meldung oder Interne Meldung No Report
NAMUR Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft für Mess- und Standardization association for instrumentation
Regeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie and control in the chemical industry
NC Öffner Normally Closed contact
NC Numerische Steuerung Numerical Control
NEMA Normengremium in USA (United States of National Electrical Manufacturers Association
America)
NM Nullmarke Zero Mark
NO Schliesser Normally Open contact
O
OA Open Architecture Open Architecture
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer Original Equipment Manufacturer
OLP Busstecker für Lichtleiter Optical Link Plug
OMI Option Module Interface Option Module Interface
P
p… Einstellparameter Adjustable parameter
PcCtrl Steuerungshoheit Master Control
PDS Leistungsteildatensatz Power unit Data Set
PE Schutzerde Protective Earth
PELV Schutzkleinspannung Protective Extra Low Voltage
PEM Permanenterregter Synchronmotor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
PG Programmiergerät Programming terminal
PI Proportional Integral Proportional Integral

Equipment Manual AC Drive


A-4 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


PID Proportional Integral Differential Proportional Integral Differential
PLC Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung (SPS) Programmable Logic Controller
PLL Baustein zur Synchronisierung Phase Locked Loop
PNO PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation PROFIBUS user organisation
PPI Punkt zu Punkt Schnittstelle Point to Point Interface
PRBS Weißes Rauschen Pseudo Random Binary Signal
PROFIBUS Serieller Datenbus Process Field Bus
PS Stromversorgung Power Supply
PSA Power Stack Adapter Power Stack Adapter
PTC Positiver Temperaturkoeffizient Positive Temperature Coefficient
PTP Punkt zu Punkt Point To Point
PWM Pulsweitenmodulation Pulse Width Modulation
PZD PROFIBUS Prozessdaten PROFIBUS process data
Q
R
r… Beobachtungsparameter (nur lesbar) Display parameter (read only)
RAM Speicher zum Lesen und Schreiben Random Access Memory
RCCB Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Residual Current Circuit Breaker
RCD Fehlerstrom-Schutzschalter Residual Current Device
RJ45 Norm. Beschreibt eine 8-polige Steckverbindung Standard Describes an 8-pole plug connector with
mit Twisted-Pair Ethernet. twisted pair Ethernet.
RKA Rückkühlanlage Cooling system
RO Nur lesbar Read Only
RPDO Receive Process Data Object Receive Process Data Object
RS232 Norm. Beschreibt die Physik einer seriellen Standard. Describes the physical characteristics of
Schnittstelle. a serial interface.
RS485 Norm. Beschreibt die Physik einer digitalen Standard Describes the physical characteristics of
seriellen Schnittstelle. a digital serial interface.
RTC Echtzeituhr Real Time Clock
S
S1 Dauerbetrieb Continuous duty
S3 Aussetzbetrieb Periodic duty
SBC Sichere Bremsenansteuerung Safe Brake Control
SOS Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe Operational Stop
SSR Sichere Bremsrampe Safe Stop Ramp
SBT Sicherer Bremsentest Safe Brake Test
SCA Sichere Nocke Safe Cam
SDI Sichere Richtung Safe Direction
SE Sicherer Software-Endschalter Safe software limit switch
SG Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely reduced speed
SGA Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang Safety-relevant output
SGE Sicherheitsgerichtetes Eingangssignal Safe input signal
SH Sicherer Halt Safe standstill

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 A-5
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


SI Safety Integrated Safety Integrated
SIL Sicherheitsintegritätsgrad Safety Integrity Level
SLI Sicheres Schrittmaß Safely Limited Increment
SLM Smart Line Module Smart Line Module
SLP Sichere Endlage Safely Limited Position
SLS Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit Safely Limited Speed
SLVC Geberlose Vektorregelung Sensorless Vector Control
SM Sensor Module Sensor Module
SMC Sensor Module Cabinet Sensor Module Cabinet
SME Sensor Module External Sensor Module External
SN Sicherer Software-Nocken Safe software cam
SOS Sicherer Betriebshalt Safe Operational Stop
SPC Sollwertkanal Setpoint Channel
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)
SS1 Safe Stop 1 Safe Stop 1
SS2 Safe Stop 2 Safe Stop 2
SSI Synchron Serielle Schnittstelle Synchronous Serial Interface
SSM Sichere Geschwindigkeitsanzeige n < nx Safe Speed Monitoring n < nx
SSR Sichere Bremsrampe Safe Stop Ramp
STO Sicherer Halt Safe Torque Off
STW PROFIBUS Steuerwort PROFIBUS control word
T
TB Terminal Board Terminal Board
TIA Totally Integrated Automation Totally Integrated Automation
TM Terminal Module Terminal Module
TN Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase line supply
Tn Nachstellzeit Integral time
TPDO Transmit Process Data Object Transmit Process Data Object
TT Drehstromversorgungsnetz geerdet Grounded three-phase line supply
TTL Transistor-Transistor-Logik Transistor Transistor Logic
U
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
USV Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
V
VC Vektorregelung Vector Control
Vdc Zwischenkreisspannung DC link voltage
VdcN Teilzwischenkreisspannung negativ Partial DC link voltage negative
VdcP Teilzwischenkreisspannung positiv Partial DC link voltage positive
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure Association of German Electrical Engineers
Vpp Volt Spitze zu Spitze Volt peak to peak
VSM Voltage Sensing Module Voltage Sensing Module

Equipment Manual AC Drive


A-6 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Abbreviation German English


W
WEA Wiedereinschaltautomatik Automatic restart
WZM Werkzeugmaschine Machine tool
X
XML Erweiterbare Auszeichnungssprache Extensible Markup Language
(Standardsprache für Web-Publishing und
Dokumentenmanagement)
Y
Z
ZK Zwischenkreis DC Link
ZSW PROFIBUS status word PROFIBUS status word

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 A-7
List of abbreviations/acronyms
A.1 List of abbreviations

Equipment Manual AC Drive


A-8 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
Index
Control Unit 310 DP (CU310 DP), 6-5
Control Unit 310 PN (CU310 PN), 6-22
A Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-34
Cooling clearances, 3-6, 9-17
Autotransformer, 2-5

D
B
Description of the interfaces
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20), 7-1
Control Unit 310 DP (CU310 DP), 6-7
Brake Relay, 7-38
Control Unit 310 PN (CU310 PN), 6-23
Braking Modules, 4-8
Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-36
Braking resistors, Blocksize, 4-1
Power Modules, Chassis, 3-44
Braking resistors, Chassis, 4-20
Dimension drawings
Blocksize line filter, 2-9
Blocksize line reactors, 2-16
C Chassis line filter, 2-10
Cabinet-Mounted Sensor Module 20 (SMC20), 7-30 Chassis line reactors, 2-20
Cable Installation, 9-12 Control Unit 310 DP (CU311 DP), 6-17
Climatic ambient conditions, 1-7 Control Unit 310 PN (CU310 PN), 6-31
Components Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-38
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20), 7-1 Motor reactors, Blocksize, 5-2
Brake Relay, 7-38 Motor reactors, Chassis, 5-17
Braking Modules, 4-8 Power Modules, Blocksize (PM340), 3-18
Braking resistors, Blocksize, 4-1 Power Modules, Chassis, 3-50
Braking resistors, Chassis, 4-20 Screening Kit, 8-12
Cabinet-Mounted Sensor Module 20 (SMC20), 7-30 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 10 (SMC10), 7-27
Control Unit 310 DP (CU310 DP), 6-5 Sinusoidal filter, Chassis, 5-20
Control Unit 310 PN (CU310 PN), 6-22 Dimension Drawings
Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-34 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-3
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-1 DRIVE-CLiQ Coupling, 8-8
DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 8-6 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 7-16
dv/dt filter Chassis, 5-22 DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-1
Line filters, 2-8 DRIVE-CLiQ coupling, 8-6
Line reactors, 2-15 dv/dt filter Chassis, 5-22
Motor reactors, 5-16
Motor reactors, Blocksize, 5-1
Power Modules, Blocksize (PM340), 3-1 E
Power Modules, Chassis, 3-42
Electrical Connections
Safe Brake Relay, 7-42
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 7-18
Screening Kit, 8-10
EMC Directive, 9-11
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 10 (SMC10), 7-21
Equipotential Bonding, 9-15
Sinusoidal filter, Chassis, 5-19
ESD information, vi
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 7-5

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0 Index-1
Index

H S
Heat dissipation, 9-17 Safe Brake Relay, 7-42
Hotline, v Safety information
Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-34
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-1, 8-6
I Line filters, 2-8
Line reactors, 2-15
Installation
Power Modules, Chassis, 3-43
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20), 7-4
Safety Information
Braking Modules, 4-14
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-1, 8-6
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-5
Screening Kit, 8-10
Installation altitude, 1-8
Screw terminals, 9-16
Isolating transformer, 2-6
Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted 10 (SMC10), 7-21
Service and maintenance, 10-2
Shielding, 8-10
L Sinusoidal filter, Chassis, 5-19
Line contactor, 9-4 Spare parts, 10-19
Line disconnecting device, 9-3 Standards, 1-8
Line filter, 2-8 Support, v
Line filter versions, 2-1 System data, 1-6
Line frequency, 1-6
Line reactor versions, 2-1
Line reactors, 2-15 T
Technical data
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20), 7-5
M Blocksize line filter, 2-14
Motor reactors, 5-16 Blocksize line reactors, 2-27
Motor reactors, Blocksize, 5-1 Braking Modules, 4-19
Mounting Braking resistors, 4-22
Screening Kit, 8-18 Braking resistors, Blocksize, 4-6
Chassis line filter, 2-14
Control Unit 310 DP (CU310 DP), 6-21
O Control Unit 310 PN (CU310 PN), 6-33
Control Unit Adapter 31 (CUA31), 6-40
Option module, brake control, 7-38
DRIVE-CLiQ cabinet gland, 8-6
Overcurrent, 9-8
DRIVE-CLiQ Coupling, 8-9
Overcurrent protection, 9-3
Line reactors, 2-29
Motor reactors, 5-18
Motor reactors Chassis, 5-18
P Motor reactors, Blocksize, 5-13
Power loss, 9-21 Power Modules Blocksize, 3-30
Power Modules, Blocksize (PM340), 3-1 Power Modules Chassis, 3-54
Power Modules, Chassis, 3-42 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted (SMC10), 7-29
Power supply, 9-7 Sinusoidal filter, Chassis, 5-21
Power Supply Units, 9-6 Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 7-20
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 7-5

R
V
Repairs, 10-1
Replacing the fan, 10-2 Ventilation, 9-19

Equipment Manual AC Drive


Index-2 Manual, (GH6), 03/2006 Edition, 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0
To Recommendation

SIEMENS AG
Corrections
A&D MC BMS for document:

Postfach 3180
SINAMICS S120
D-91050 Erlangen Equipment Manual (GH6)
Tel.: +49 (0) 180 / 5050 - 222 (Hotline)
Fax.: +49 (0) 9131 / 98 - 63315 (Documentation)
email: motioncontrol.docu@siemens.com Manufacturer / Service Documentation
From Equipment Manual

Name Order no.: 6SL3097-2AL00-0BP0


Your company address/dept. Edition: 03/2006
Should you come across any printing errors when
Address
reading this publication, please notify us on this
Postal code: City: sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also
Phone: / welcome.

Fax: /
Recommendations and/or suggestions
Overview of SINAMICS Documentation (03/2006)
General Documentation/Catalogs

SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS


G110 G130 S120 S150
G120 G150

D11.1 D11 D21.1 D21.3


Converter Chassis Units Converter Chassis Units Chassis Units Vector Control Cabinet Units
0.12 – 3 kW Converter Cabinet Units 75 – 1200 kW

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS SINAMICS


G110 G120 G130 G150 GM150
SM150

– Getting Started – Operating Instructions (Compact)


– Operating Instructions – Operating Instructions – Operating Instructions – Operating Instructions – Operating Instructions
– List Manual – List Manual – List Manual – List Manual – List Manual

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINAMICS SINAMICS
S120 S150

– Getting Started – Operating Instructions


– Equipment Manual for Control Units and Additional System Components – List Manual
– Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Modules
– Equipment Manual Booksize Cold-Plate Power Sections
– Chassis Power Sections
– Equipment Manual AC DRIVE
– Commissioning Manual – Commissioning Manual CANopen
– Function Manual – Function Manual Free Function Blocks
– List Manual

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINAMICS
G...
S...
Motors

DOCONCD Configuration Manual EMC


Motors Installation Guideline
















































 

 
 
6LHPHQV$*
$XWRPDWLRQ 'ULYHV 
0RWLRQ&RQWURO6\VWHPV  š6LHPHQV$*
3RVWIDFK'(UODQJHQ 6XEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWSULRUQRWLFH
*HUPDQ\ 2UGHU1R6/$/%3

ZZZVLHPHQVFRPPRWLRQFRQWURO 3ULQWHGLQ*HUPDQ\

You might also like